JP7509967B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can be controlled to a favorable state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that is controlled to a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the display of seven symbols stopped in a line on a decorative symbol display device.

JP 2014-147575 A

The gaming machine described above is configured to issue a right-hit instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball launch handle during the jackpot start performance, but there is still room for improvement in the instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in such a specific direction.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can optimally execute instructions that prompt the player to launch a gaming ball in a specific direction.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means;
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance;
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area ;
a guide light-emitting means for emitting guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light-emitting portion of the light-emitting means;
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in either a first light emitting state in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is low, or a second light emitting state in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, different from the first light emitting state;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
displaying the second guidance display in a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, displaying the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period during the predetermined period that is after the first period , and in the subsequent period, ending the first guidance display while displaying the second guidance display;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
the guidance light-emitting means causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a manner different from the guidance light-emitting means during the first period, turns off the light-emitting means before the second period starts, and performs the guidance light-emitting means in conjunction with the first guidance display when the second period starts,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after the reach effect is started,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
A special vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means during a specific effect period, which is an execution period of the specific effect.
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means during the specific effect period can be executed,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
In the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, the light emitting means corresponding to the operation means can be made to emit light,
When the predetermined vibration performance is executed at the first timing and when the predetermined vibration performance is executed at the second timing, the light emitting means corresponding to the operation means can be caused to emit light in a common manner;
When the first special vibration performance is executed and when the second special vibration performance is executed, the light emitting means corresponding to the operation means can be illuminated in different manners.
It is characterized by:
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the first means is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result, the gaming machine comprising: an operation means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player; vibration effect execution means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 using the operation unit effect control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates; and a light emitting effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 which executes the variable display effect process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (e.g., the light emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operation unit effect control means to emit light, and a specific effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 which executes the variable display effect process of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., the reach effect of SP reach A, the big win confirmation notification, the big win type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game, and the rate at which the game is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., the operation unit effect pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and is capable of executing the specified vibration effect at the timing when a variable display is started (for example, execution of a vibration effect in timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11), and the vibration form is different between the specified vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44), and further, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and is capable of executing the specified vibration effect at the timing when a variable display is started (for example, execution of a vibration effect in timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.), and the vibration form is different between the specified vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44), and further, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a game medium in a game area in accordance with a player's operation. The game device comprises a launch means capable of launching, and a guidance display means for displaying a guidance using an image to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game medium can flow in the game area, the guidance display including a first guidance display and a second guidance display, the guidance display means performing the second guidance display before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start performance notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, performing the first guidance display after the name display of the advantageous state is completed and continuing the second guidance display, and during a period after the predetermined period, terminating the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
According to this configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Also, interest in the game can be increased by diversifying the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Also, instructions that prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction can be executed in an optimal manner.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as those shown in JP Patent Publication No. 2014-147575, have been configured to issue a right-hit instruction during execution of a jackpot start performance, prompting the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating a ball launching handle. However, there is still room for improvement in such instructions prompting the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction, and in light of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can suitably execute instructions prompting the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result, comprising: a launching means that can launch a gaming medium into a gaming area in response to operation by the player; and a guidance display means that uses image displays to display guidance to encourage the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the gaming medium can flow in the gaming area, the guidance display including a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means is characterized in that, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, it displays the second guidance display before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start performance that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, it displays the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display, and during a period after the predetermined period, it ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, it continues the second guidance display. According to this feature, an instruction to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction can be preferably executed.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. A front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic portion 10SH. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of a jackpot. A figure showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and visual guidance effects. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A diagram showing an example configuration of a performance device for characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. A figure showing an example of settings when executing an operation unit performance pattern and a specific linked performance. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing settings of vibration patterns. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance using vibration and light emission. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting a continuous performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting the timing at which an operation unit performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. A figure showing an example of the execution of a presentation in which a game effect lamp is illuminated. A figure showing an example of setting a performance period during which a specific linked performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of music playback execution. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to a characteristic portion of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. An explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A flowchart showing an example of a performance processing during a jackpot. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing after a jackpot has ended. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting state of a lamp. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1 hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the second round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided that is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning opening (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 may display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview performance determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result includes the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" and the case where the variable display result is "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined as one of multiple decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which no setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 10-3 shows an example of a setting for the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 10-3 is prestored as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision ratio of "presentation" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". With such a decision ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the percentage of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" and being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

Figure 10-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether the symbol display color is changed and, if changed, the display color. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the expectation level is low, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting that the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 10-4 (B) shows an example of settings for the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 10-4 (B) is stored in advance in the ROM 121 as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11, etc. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a given performance device, such as displaying a given performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting a given sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as the execution period of the performance in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using the reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute the performance during the variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern (step S248), and the performance processing during the variable display is terminated.

The change performance period may be set to a different length of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance that is often performed even in an unfavorable case (unfavorable performance), there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a sense of discomfort to the player because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and the device waits. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command could not be received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 10-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. The decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and a reach is established, and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect, resulting in a reach development. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an effect image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, an effect image announcing a message such as "Change in symbol display color!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the symbol display color.

Figure 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 10-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 10-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 10-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that the highest set value, 6, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing, or a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making any suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, a suggestion regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, a suggestion may be given regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state, depending on whether it is controlled or not.

(Description of characteristic portion 10SH)
Next, a characteristic feature 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH has an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 has a push button 31B that the player can press to give a specific command.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a gaze guidance effect execution means capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 10SH has a higher expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a higher reliability of winning when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means of feature section 10SH can execute a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at either of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and timing T2 when a reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether it is either timing T1 or timing T2, or either timing T3 or timing T4.

The visual line guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH does not execute visual line guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute visual line guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2.

The visual guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to characteristic unit 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from a vibration effect and a gaze guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect of a super reach.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is provided with a display means for displaying information. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 for displaying various performance images.

The display of the visual guidance effect related to characteristic part 10SH has a lower priority than the display of specified information, and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information. For example, the visual guidance effect image has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH, and shows the layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent material, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. With this configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

The push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate when driven by a vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is configured, for example, as an eccentric motor in which a weight with an offset center of gravity is attached to the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to provide a variety of vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L, 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided to the left of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided to the right of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L, 9R have multiple LEDs built in along the extension direction of the game effect lamps 9L, 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, turning on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lamps to be turned on/off. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits that drive the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 10SH. The performance control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display to be executed and the display result of the variable display to be executed (step 10SHS1). The fluctuation pattern and display result are identified by the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display starts and analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to a combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, lottery refers to a method of determination using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The random number value uses one of the performance random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random number update process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). A vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect that is not linked to a preview effect. In the processing of step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect by drawing lots using random number values and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121.

In the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the decision value to be compared with the random number value should be assigned to the decision result of whether or not a vibration effect is to be performed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is to be performed, so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is performed than when the vibration effect is not performed, and the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is performed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is calculated, for example, as follows: (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") / {(probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is not a "jackpot")}.

Therefore, the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2 only needs to specify the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot" and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot" so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect will be a predetermined value.

(Vibration effects and jackpot reliability)
11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a plurality of types of vibration effects, which are execution patterns SE1 to SE10, according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, or timing T2 when a reach is achieved. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved. Also, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. Also, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. The performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as vibration effects at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, which can increase interest.

In addition, regardless of whether it is timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, or timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors, regardless of when the vibration effect can be executed. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. Also, in this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot for the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result definitively indicates that a jackpot has been displayed.

This configuration allows the user to focus on the color of the light emitted by the push button 31B when it vibrates, and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the timing of execution of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts than when it is executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. Also, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed than when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts.

This configuration can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. Also, if the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a specified reach state when no vibration effect is executed at timing T1, it can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, rather than at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed. And, when a vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, it can further heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of normal reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the Super Reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of Super Reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of Super Reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the Super Reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of Super Reach reach performance.

With this configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed can be used as a chance-up effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is always vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors, and the display result is definitively notified that it is a "jackpot."

This configuration can heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, rather than timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. And when the vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it can further heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In this way, in this embodiment, the sense of expectation for the vibration effect to be executed can be changed in a complex manner as the display of the decorative patterns progresses.

In addition, by setting the probability of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to a sufficiently low probability compared to the probability of executing other vibration effects, it is possible to increase the excitement when it is definitively notified that the display result is a "jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, when push button 31B is vibrated to produce a vibration effect, push button 31B is always illuminated.

This configuration allows the user to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, increasing the chances that the user will recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation then determines, based on the result of the determination in step 10SHS2, whether or not to execute a vibration presentation at either timing T3 when the normal reach presentation is being executed, or timing T4 when the super reach presentation is being executed in the current variable display (step 10SHS3).

When a vibration effect is to be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach effect (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect (step 10SHS4). An eye-guiding effect is an effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect by drawing lots using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121. In the table referenced in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio for the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect is set regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect at the same ratio regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed this time.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, a gaze guidance effect can be executed.

This configuration allows the push button 31B to be noticed before the vibration effect is executed, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

On the other hand, if a vibration effect is executed at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the gaze guidance effect is not executed.

When the display result is derived and displayed, a "miss" display result may be displayed, and then a rescue effect may be executed, resulting in the true display result being derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and the current variable display has started, if a gaze guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, this may give the wrong impression that a rescue effect was executed in the previous variable display. In contrast, in this embodiment, a gaze guidance effect is not executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, thereby preventing such a misunderstanding.

In addition, if a visual guidance effect is executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state. In contrast, in this embodiment, a visual guidance effect is not executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, so that it is possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, if a vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach reach effect (step 10SHS3; No), or after executing the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as a reach effect, and the type of effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute various effects such as a preview effect, and the type of effect, by a lottery. At this time, the probability of winning is varied depending on whether or not a preview effect is executed and the type of effect, by varying the determination ratio in the lottery depending on the current display result and the current fluctuation pattern. Also, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern will be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance that has been decided to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special chart fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as the initial value for the performance control process timer, and stores in the timer value storage area of RAM 122 performance specific data that specifies the type and mode of the performance that has been decided to be executed, and an execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the performance by comparing it with the timer value of the performance control process timer, in association with each other. If there are multiple performances that have been decided to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores the performance specific data and the execution timing specific timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start executing the variable display of the decorative pattern in the manner specified by the current variation pattern and which derives the determined final stop pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Then, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration and gaze guidance effects)
11-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts or timing T2 when a reach is established. Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed or timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

In addition, as described above, when the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a vibration effect at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a gaze guidance effect before that.

In this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T3 while a normal reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T3, and starts the vibration effect when timing T3 is reached. Similarly, in this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T4 while a super reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T4, and starts the vibration effect when timing T4 is reached. The presentation period for the gaze guidance effect in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the gaze guidance effect is being executed.

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Example of performance)
11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing examples of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. In these examples, a vibration effect is executed at timing T4 during the execution of the reach effect of a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach reach performances. In the reach performance of a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a background image 10SHY of a "mountain view" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the reach performance of the super reach is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach was achieved. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a "left" reach decorative pattern 10SH5L is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L when the reach was achieved, and a "right" reach decorative pattern 10SH5R is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R when the reach was achieved.

In addition, a small pattern display area 10SHK, which is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, is provided in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is also called the notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing the small pattern that is the notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing the confirmed small pattern that is the display result is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decorative pattern is performed. During the period from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the determined decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of the small pattern continues in a constant display mode and does not disappear from the screen or be blocked by an obstruction. Therefore, the small pattern display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always see the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 10SHK. The small pattern variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK is also called a constant small pattern or a small pattern for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a performance image showing a plurality of types of small patterns that are identifiable each other may be variably displayed as a notification information image in a display mode that is partially or entirely common to each of the plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern showing a number similar to the portion showing a number in the decorative pattern. The small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A).

In addition, a fourth pattern may be provided following the special and decorative patterns, and the fourth pattern may be variable displayed in sync with the variable display of the special and decorative patterns. The variable display of the fourth pattern may be realized, for example, by continuing display control that repeatedly displays and hides a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth pattern, the display result in the variable display of the small patterns may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, to the right side of the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the variable display of the special symbol is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. In response to this, by performing a variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to display whether the variable display is in progress or whether the display result has been derived in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In this example, a pending display area 10SHH is displayed to display a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA is displayed to display an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. Note that when a reach performance of a super reach is being executed, the pending display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may be hidden.

In addition, a reserved number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similar to the reserved number display area 10SHH, the reserved number of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed in a specific manner. The display form is a form in which it is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the gaze guidance presentation 4 seconds before timing T4 during the execution of the reach presentation of the super reach. As a gaze guidance presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation that uses a visual presentation effect, for example, to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

In this example, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC that resembles a character holding a hammer, and a button image 10SHB that resembles a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character performs the action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside, in accordance with the character's action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside, in time with the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the appearance of the various images so that the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and multiple "star" effect images 10SHS that resemble stars scatter from the button image 10SHB. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 starts a vibration performance, vibrating the push button 31B and lighting up the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Then, one second after timing T4, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the gaze guidance presentation, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration presentation has elapsed, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the vibration presentation, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and turns off the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Here, the push button 31B is located away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the play area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the state of the push button 31B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the push button 31B is vibrating or lit up. In response to this, by executing a gaze guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before it vibrates, and the vibration of the push button 31B can be appropriately recognized, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

The priority of the display of the visual guidance effects is set lower than that of the constant small symbols and the reserved number display. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the visual guidance effects in a layer behind the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the reserved number display.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the constant small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the constant small pattern.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the reserved number display shown in the reserved number display area 10SHHS, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the reserved number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the eye guidance effects is set higher than the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative patterns. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the eye guidance effects in a layer that is closer to the front than the layers that display the background image and decorative patterns.

In this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery," and it can be said that the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB, which are displays for guiding the viewer's gaze, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery."

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the character image 10SHC, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area 10SHH, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the reserved display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the active display.

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring optimal visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the display of the visual guidance effect and the constant small pattern and the number of reserved items, which have a higher priority than the display of the visual guidance effect, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display can be more optimally ensured at all times, while the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made more noticeable.

(Modification of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect may be set according to which type of vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect at different ratios according to whether the current vibration effect is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Here, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red is executed. Also, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the gaze-guiding effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. With this configuration, the execution of the gaze-guiding effect can increase the expectation of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance may be capable of executing a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance. In this case, as a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance, multiple types of vibration performance may be executed according to a combination of the linked advance notice performance, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a feature advance notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed according to the operating state of the movable body 32. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a vibration performance linked with a highly reliable feature advance notice performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked feature advance notice performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be a performance that increases the chances of winning in the feature advance notice performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may also be capable of executing a vibration performance linked to other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration performance vibrates the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview performance, and causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 may be one in which the jackpot game state is started when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole, after the determined decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination is derived. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the player of the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may also execute a vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and notifies the player that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B may be vibrated for three seconds and illuminated in rainbow colors to definitively announce that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is the highest number of rounds among the multiple options. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing an error notification process. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, an error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5, or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 may display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing a gaze guidance performance. In that case, the display of the gaze guidance performance may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. With this configuration, even if a gaze guidance performance is executed when the error notification image is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image can be preferably ensured.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the gaze guidance effect is performed and when the gaze guidance effect is not performed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is performed than when the gaze guidance effect is not performed, it is possible to increase the interest when the gaze guidance effect is performed and the vibration effect is performed. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is not performed than when the gaze guidance effect is performed, it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating even if the gaze guidance effect is not performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different before the reference timing and after the reference timing, with a certain timing as the reference. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before the timing T2 when the reach is established, and 3 seconds at the timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2, or at the timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2. In this way, the vibration time after the reference timing is longer than the vibration time before the reference timing. This configuration can enhance the performance effect when the vibration performance is executed after the reference timing.

The reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be varied depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B. For example, the push button 31B may be vibrated with a first strength and a second strength greater than the first strength, and when the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength, the reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be made higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the strength of the vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win may be the same for a first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and a second type of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first type. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win executed in the first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second type of pachinko gaming machine 1, respectively, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunities to execute the vibration effect.

In addition, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is the first mode and when it is the second mode. For example, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and when it is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect.

Alternatively, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be set to be only executable at any one of multiple timings at which a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress. For example, the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be executed only at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which a vibration effect as a look-ahead preview can be executed, it is possible to conveniently recognize that a vibration effect has been executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress.

When a vibration performance is executed as a pre-reading notice performance at a timing when a vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance. For example, when a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continues to vibrate for a predetermined time, and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. With this configuration, when a vibration effect can be executed as a pre-reading preview effect at a timing when a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, it is possible to easily recognize which vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are common between a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type, the jackpot reliability may be common even if the mode of the vibration effect executed at the specific timing in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the mode of the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1. For example, even if the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed at the timing T2 when a reach is established in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is 100%. With this configuration, even if the type of pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B during the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect being executed at that time, for example, when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed. For example, when an announcement effect is executed to announce that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when the reach is achieved, the vibration effect is set to vibrate the push button 31B during the period when the image of the announcement effect is being displayed. With this configuration, even when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed for vibration effects of the same execution pattern. With this configuration, for example, when a vibration effect is executed as an effect to increase the chances of another effect, it is possible to flexibly adjust the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect while preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect can execute a provocative effect that encourages the development of a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability than the reach state after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination. After the provocative effect is executed, there are cases where the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and cases where the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss". When the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative success effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. On the other hand, when the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss", the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative failure effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. When executing such a provocation effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing when the provocation success effect is executed. This configuration can increase the interest when the provocation success effect is executed.

The vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be adjusted to match the image of the teasing success effect. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the interest when the teasing success effect is executed.

The illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be the same as the illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. With this configuration, when the teasing success effect is executed, even if it develops into a reach state with a high jackpot reliability, the display result may be "miss," but it is possible to prevent the jackpot reliability from being excessively increased.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot," the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a vibration effect immediately before the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, is stopped. This configuration not only increases the interest in the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped, but also heightens the sense of anticipation for the vibration effect itself, and can increase interest when the vibration effect is executed at other times as well.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect can be "rainbow-colored" even when a "jackpot" occurs for a jackpot type other than the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different advantages for the player. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect becomes "rainbow-colored," it is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that a "jackpot" occurs for the jackpot type with the highest advantage.

If there are only two types of jackpots that provide players with different degrees of advantage, it is possible to avoid setting an execution pattern in which the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a jackpot of a type that provides a low degree of advantage to the player from occurring even if the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects, and thus prevents the player's expectations for the vibration effects from being diminished.

The presentation control CPU 120 may use an auditory presentation effect to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B as a visual guidance presentation. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may output a specific sound effect when a vibration presentation is being executed, and output the specific sound effect as a visual guidance presentation so that the volume gradually changes from a low volume to a high volume. With this configuration, a player who has difficulty recognizing visual guidance presentations that use visual presentation effects can be directed to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

When the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the same execution pattern may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. For example, even when the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is "jackpot", the expectation of the highly advantageous setting value can be increased.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. With this configuration, the setting value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is any of "1" to "3" and when the setting value is any of "4" to "6". With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is a high setting that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player. Also, for example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is an odd number and when the setting value is an even number. With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is an even number that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player.

Even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. With this configuration, even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to draw attention not only to the fact that the vibration effect is being executed, but also to the state when the vibration effect is executed.

If it is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the reach is established. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is not executed at either the timing T1 or the timing T2, the combination of the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T1 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T2 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, even if the vibration effect that vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to glow in rainbow colors is not executed when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern begins, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation for the vibration effect to be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is achieved, and to further increase attention to the vibration effect at the timing T2.

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect. In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T3 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed, not only can the expectation of the vibration effect being executed at timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect be increased, but the attention to the vibration effect at timing T4 can be further increased.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is not definitely a "jackpot" is monotonous, whereas in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot", the push button 31B vibrates in accordance with a predetermined rhythm. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When a vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when a normal reach is being performed or at timing T4 when a super reach is being performed, a visual guidance effect may be executed without fail. With this configuration, the sense of expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of a reach effect can be appropriately increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means.

When a vibration effect is executed at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started or the timing T2 when a reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at either the timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the execution pattern of the vibration effect executable at the timing T3 or the timing T4 may be restricted so that the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 are not inferior to the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2, in other words, so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 is not inferior to the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is restricted from being executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is restricted from being executed at timing T4. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the jackpot from decreasing when multiple vibration effects are executed in one variable display.

When it is possible to execute a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the preview performance and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the preview performance may be different. For example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a reel preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the sound effect when the reel operates. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is illuminated in a color different from the illumination color of the push button 31B in a vibration effect not linked to a preview performance. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed, it is easy to recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to a preview performance or not.

It may be possible to execute a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the open present box, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), and a gaze-guiding effect may be executed. With this configuration, the execution of the present box effect may increase the sense of anticipation for the gaze-guiding effect and the vibration effect.

When an operation performance for operating the push button 31B can be executed, the push button 31B may be lit in this operation performance during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In this case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the lighting manner of the push button 31B in the vibration performance. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for vibration performance in which the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in red for 3 seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for button operation suggestion in which the push button 31B is switched between red illumination (illumination) and non-illumination (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In addition, during a valid lever operation period during which the operation of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A may be lit up to notify that the operation of the operating lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is lit up in a lever operation suggestion mode during the valid lever operation period. The lighting mode for the lever operation suggestion may be the same as the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion, or may be a different lighting mode from the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion.

For example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like may be operated by the player to change settings related to the effects, such as the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from a menu screen, or a different operation may be performed corresponding to the item to be changed by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. In addition, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lit to notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 10SH)
In relation to characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, see JP 2019-051075 A).

Generally, players play games while looking at the display means on which the variable display and various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, there is a possibility that the player will not be aware that the operating means is vibrating even when a vibration effect is executed. In such a case, the interest provided by the vibration effect cannot be sufficiently heightened.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effects are executed and to sufficiently heighten interest in the vibration effects, the gaming machine of means 1 relating to characteristic section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, etc.), and includes operation means that can be operated by the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a push button 31B that the player can press to perform a predetermined instruction operation, etc.), and vibration effect execution means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates, etc.), and is configured to attract the player's attention. and a visual line guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides a line to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the push button 31B, etc.), and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 1 20 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when a reach is established, and any one of timing T3 during which a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing T4 during which a reach effect of a super reach is being executed), and is capable of executing the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and The vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether the timing is T1 or T4), and the visual guidance effect execution means does not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute a visual guidance effect at timings T1 and T2), and can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timings T3 and T4).

This configuration allows the player to focus on the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and can adequately increase interest in the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 relating to feature 10SH may be such that in the gaming machine of means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 relating to characteristic part 10SH may be equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the gaze guidance effect in the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, etc.).

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be performed while a specific effect is being performed, which can increase interest.

The gaming machine of feature 10SH according to means 4 may be equipped with a display means for displaying information in any of the gaming machines according to means 1 to 3 (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying various presentation images, etc.), and the display of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the display of specified information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information (e.g., the presentation image of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the constant small symbols, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, decorative symbols, etc.).

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring the visibility of the specified information.

The gaming machine of feature 5 relating to feature 10SH is a gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4, in which the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect of the first mode and the vibration effect of the second mode which suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the first mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white is executed). (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed), and when the visual guidance effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed than the first vibration effect (for example, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed).

With this configuration, the gaze guidance effect can be executed, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the execution of the second type of vibration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature of the characteristic feature 10SH may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate. The combined feature features or individual feature features that are not combined may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of the performance device related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance, which serves as a movable performance device, is provided at the lower end front, which is the lower edge part on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operation motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operation solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame of the movable body 32 is made of a decorative material and has a configuration that can be covered so that the player cannot see the display screen of the image display device 5. The window of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through configuration that allows the player to see the display screen of the image display device 5.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, multiple LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and multiple LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the game machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position to the left of the game area in the game machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position to the right of the game area in the game machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and multiple LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of multiple LEDs built into the operating stick (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of multiple LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be formed in part or in whole from a translucent material. As a result, when the lever lamp 9B1 is turned on, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated. Also, when the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, the push button 31B can be illuminated.

For example, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or in a position close to the push button 31B, or may be built into the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or provided at the base position of the operation lever. Multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

In the pachinko game machine 1, an operation section performance including a light-emitting performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestive performance that indicates that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration manner according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Note that in the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, one of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. For example, only the push button 31B may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting only the button lamp 9B2.

Figure 12-2 (A) shows an example of the setting of an operation unit performance pattern used to execute an operation unit performance. In this setting example, operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to AKC13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as multiple operation unit performance patterns. A light emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and use are set corresponding to each operation unit performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the light emission state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the vibration state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern indicates the percentage of times that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state when the operation unit presentation corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern is executed. The usage corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern indicates the timing at which the operation unit presentation is executed for each operation unit presentation pattern.

The operation unit performance can be executed at multiple times in accordance with the progress of the variable display, such as when the pre-change starts, when the target change starts, when a reach is established, when the reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification tease is given. The pre-change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. The target change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. When a reach is established, it is a timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes a reach state. When a reach develops, it is a timing corresponding to the case where a development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of a super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies the execution of the reach performance of a super reach (reach development) after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed. When a hit/miss notification tease is given, it is a timing corresponding to the tease performance before the hit/miss notification performance that notifies the execution of whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not while the reach performance of a super reach is being executed.

In the example setting shown in FIG. 12-2(A), multiple operation unit performance patterns that can be used to execute operation unit performances according to multiple timings are prepared in advance. Also, it is set up so that different operation unit performance patterns can be used according to multiple timings at which the operation unit performances can be executed.

When the reach performance of the super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach performance of the normal reach is executed and the reach performance of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether the reach performance of the super reach is executed and the fixed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether the game state is controlled to the jackpot. For the reach performance of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach performances including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances with different performance modes. Each reach performance may include performances with a common performance mode. The determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" may be set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach performance. It is only necessary to set the presence or absence of the reach performance, the presence or absence of the reach performance of the super reach, the performance mode in the reach performance, etc. according to the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random number value for determining the variation pattern.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as reach effects, the execution of the operation unit effects can be determined at a predetermined rate according to whether the variable display result is a "jackpot". Such operation unit effects that can be executed regardless of specific effects are also called standalone operation unit effects. In contrast, effects that cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light or vibrate in association with specific effects may be executed. Effects that cause light emission or vibration in association with such specific effects are also called specific linked effects.

Figure 12-2 (B) shows a setting example when a specific interlocking performance is executed. In this setting example, the light emission color and vibration pattern are set when a specific interlocking performance is executed in conjunction with multiple specific performances, such as the movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The light emission color in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is common to the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking performance is included in the special vibration performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. The illumination of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during a specific linked performance is included in the specific illumination performances that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance.

The reach effect of SP Reach A may have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type selection CH1 may have a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the smallest (e.g., 4 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH2 may have a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is the second jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the largest (e.g., 16 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH1 and CH2 may be selection effects related to the type of jackpot depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot game state, or the end condition, or may be selection effects related to the presence or absence or amount of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, in the jackpot game state. As the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, when the jackpot game state can be controlled to a certain probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that entered the V entry port of the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the end conditions of the certain probability variable control. When the small win game state can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V entry due to a game ball entering the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a small win game state or a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the jackpot game state controlled after the occurrence of a V entry.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and then, during the period from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released to the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. Then, when a V winning occurs, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and a performance including the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is more difficult to detect than the strong vibration monitoring state. In a period in which there is a high risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state. In contrast, in a period in which there is a low risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, it is sufficient that the performance control CPU 120 can execute control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an alarm image, outputting an alarm sound, turning on an alarm lamp, outputting an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put into a game stop state under the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100. This allows appropriate vibration monitoring and prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to an inappropriate abnormality judgment resulting in a vibration error being notified or a game stop state being put into place.

Figure 12-3 shows the vibration pattern settings. A number of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Figure 12-3 (A) shows the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. Figure 12-3 (B) shows the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effects included in the specific linked effects.

Vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on and off periods alternate three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed when the pre-fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV02, the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed when the pre-change starts. In addition, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed when the target change starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-change start or the target change start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC02, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation unit presentation using operation unit presentation pattern AKC11, the color of the light emitted by the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is white in response to the vibration presentation.

In vibration pattern AKV03, the vibration mode has an on period that continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effects by operation unit effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed when the target fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the operation unit effects by vibration pattern AKV03 are not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the target fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is rainbow.

In vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode during the on period matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes orange.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when a reach is reached, an effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is reached. For example, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is reached. Also, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is reached. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is reached and the operation unit effect executed when the pre-change starts or the target change starts. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that an increase in the control burden and control data of the effect can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the performance AKS1 when a reach develops. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the light color in the light-emitting performance that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration performance becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKS2 when a reach develops. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32, the light color in the light effect that illuminates the stick controller 31A and push button 31B in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach develops, an effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the reach development. For example, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops. Also, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach develops and the operation unit effect executed when the pre-change starts or the target change starts. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that an increase in the control burden and control data of the effect can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period may continue until the player's action on the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inviting the winner or loser. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the win/lose notification effect. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the light color of the light-emitting effect that causes the stick controller 31A and push button 31B to light up in conjunction with the vibration effect is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect is performed by the vibration pattern AKV31, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be varied depending on the type of effect performed with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. When the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have a light-emitting mode for vibration effect that continuously emits gold light over the period in which the operation lever and push button 31B are vibrated. On the other hand, when the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between red light emission (on) different from gold and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. By executing a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode is switched between light-emitting and non-light-emitting every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation of the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is valid while executing the vibration effect. Alternatively, the priority of the light-emitting control may be made different by using a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set. For example, in the first lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between red light-emitting (on) and non-light-emitting (off) every 150 milliseconds. In the second lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a special operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is continuously lighted in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. Then, the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is executed with priority over the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. This allows the light emission pattern for suggesting a special operation to be prioritized over the light emission pattern for suggesting a normal operation as the light emission pattern for the light emission effect.

The multiple reach effects that become super reaches may include a strong SP reach with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of a strong SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed after a motion detection effect is executed by detecting the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a strong SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode continues for an on period until the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. In the reach effect of a weak SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed without executing a motion detection effect. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a weak SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit/miss notification effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the valid detection period. Alternatively, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds and an off period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B is not vibrated during the valid detection period. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed and the operation performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed. For example, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the valid detection period. In contrast, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds to emit gold light.

Vibration pattern AKV41 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV42 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the screen display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV43 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV44 provides a vibration pattern in which the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

Vibration by vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes blue along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes gold along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the special linked performance that is executed in conjunction with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the special light-emitting performance changes from blue to red to gold in response to the vibration of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

The vibrations caused by vibration pattern AKV44 may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, or may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, CH2. In specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes white as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH2, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

Figure 12-4 shows an example of an effect that is executed by vibrating and illuminating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, multiple effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B only need to emit light with a normal light emission brightness set to a low light emission color so that the light emission color is white in the normal light emission state. Alternatively, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-illumination so that they do not emit light in the normal light emission state.

In the performance execution example AKA01, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white. When an operation unit performance is executed using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the light color becomes white. The operation unit performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a pre-variation. The operation unit performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a target variation. Both operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performances using the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22. The light color also becomes white when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific performance.

In the example of effect execution, AKA02, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light color becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. When playing music for SP Reach A as a specific effect, a performance period in which the light color becomes red is also included.

In the example of effect execution, AKA03, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13, the light-emitting color becomes rainbow. Operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 have a jackpot reliability of 100%. Operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. Operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. The light-emitting color also becomes rainbow when a specific effect such as a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

In the performance execution example AKA04, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in pink. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 is executed, the light color becomes pink. Operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV11.

In the performance execution example AKA05, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in orange. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 is executed, the light color becomes orange. Operation unit performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV12.

In performance execution example AKV06, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated blue. When an operation section performance is executed, the light color does not turn blue. When the movable body operation of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light color turns blue. Also, when music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light color turns blue is included.

In the performance execution example AKV07, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in gold. When an operation section performance is executed by operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. Operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing an operation section performance during a hit/miss notification. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV31. When an image display of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light emission color becomes gold. Also, when a music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light emission color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emission colors of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance. In addition to the light emission color, any light emission mode, such as the light emission time, the number of times light is emitted (the number of times it flashes), the light emission cycle (the flashing cycle), and the light emission brightness, may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance.

When the operation section performance is executed at the start of the advance variation, it can be executed as a pre-reading notice performance or a continuous notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" continuously over multiple variable displays that are executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance can be executed using a continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number. The reserved memory number here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning. As the continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number, multiple continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning, and is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

Figure 12-5 shows an example of the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance. The continuous performance pattern can be determined, for example, by using a random number value for determining the continuous performance pattern, referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determining the determination result to which a determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the result of the winning determination.

Figure 12-5 (A) shows the continuous performance patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC11 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (B) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "3". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (C) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "4". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as a pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 12-6, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the execution of a pre-reading notice performance that becomes a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is judged whether the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning (starting port winning designation command, reserved memory number notification command, winning time judgment result command) has been received. If no command is received, it is judged that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. If a command is received, the notification content according to the received command is identified, and the winning time judgment result is identified as the notification content according to the winning time judgment result command, for example.

The winning judgment result may be a result of judging whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern by the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process process using the game random number extracted at the start winning. The winning judgment result may be, for example, any of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmation on miss, reach confirmation on miss, and general on miss. The winning judgment result of a jackpot is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot judgment range and is controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result of a super reach confirmation on miss is a judgment result included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range on miss, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result for a reach confirmation on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range on a miss. The winning judgment result for a general win on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range on a miss nor within the reach confirmation range.

The pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, the pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the current winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, and all previous winning judgment results corresponding to the reserved memory have been general on a miss. Note that if the pre-reading prediction performance that will result in a consecutive prediction performance is already set to start, the pre-reading prediction condition may be restricted from being established.

If the pre-reading prediction condition is not met (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading prediction setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading prediction condition is met (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction (step AKS102). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction may be extracted, and depending on the result of the winning judgment, a pre-reading prediction execution decision table stored in advance in ROM121 may be referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction, thereby determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance. In step AKS102, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance, either "no execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is not executed, or "execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is executed. It is determined whether or not the result of the decision at this time has been determined to be "execution" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Next, the consecutive performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the consecutive performance pattern may be extracted, and the consecutive performance pattern may be determined to be one of a number of patterns by referring to a consecutive performance pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to the winning judgment result.

After the continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105, a pre-reading preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading preview flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control flag setting section) may be set to the ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, if the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be established, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step AKS102 and the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, step AKS102 may determine "execution yes" to execute the pre-reading notice performance at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, in step AKS105, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. In this way, it is sufficient that the continuous notice performance that becomes the pre-reading notice performance can be executed based on the winning judgment result that becomes the pre-reading judgment result.

Figure 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of Figure 9 as a variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 12-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the final decorative pattern as the variable display result of the decorative pattern (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The variable pattern designation command and the display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the start of the special pattern's variation when the variable pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special pattern process process. The variable pattern designation command is a performance control command that designates the variable pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a performance control command that designates the variable display result determined using a random number value for determining the special pattern display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display results may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability change (jackpot)", and "probability change (jackpot)".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a probability change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same even-numbered patterns is determined as the final stop pattern. Also, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," it is sufficient to be able to determine a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same odd-numbered patterns as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a non-reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When determining a combination of fixed decorative patterns, for example, numerical data that will be a random number value for pattern determination is extracted, and the stopping pattern of the decorative patterns can be determined by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in ROM121 according to the variable display content.

After the final stop pattern and the like are determined, the operation section presentation is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. For example, if the pre-reading preview flag is on, it may be determined that a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. If a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operation section presentation pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the consecutive presentation pattern. The consecutive presentation pattern may be the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading preview setting process, and may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading preview flag may be cleared to the off state.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is not being performed, the presence or absence of the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit performance pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation unit performance may be extracted, and depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot", the presence or absence of the operation unit performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the operation unit performance, and the operation unit performance pattern to be used when executing the operation unit performance may be determined by referring to an operation unit performance determination table previously stored in RAM121. The operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display may be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is not being performed, and may not be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is being performed. Therefore, a limit is set for the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit performance included in the pre-reading notice performance is executed.

In step AKS202, when a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance is executed in conjunction with a specific performance based on a fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted. For example, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at any timing. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that all operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit performance at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at the timing corresponding to the development of the reach or the announcement of the hit or miss. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that some operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. In addition, within the range of the variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be set so that some or all of the operation unit effects are difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, which determines the operation unit effects in step AKS202, can limit the execution of the operation unit effects, including the vibration effect, when a special vibration effect is executed.

When the operation unit performance is determined by step AKS202, if a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the result of the judgment at the time of winning, the determination ratio of the operation unit performance may be set so that some or all of the operation unit performance is more likely to be executed during the execution of the variable display than when the special performance is not executed.

After the operation section performance is determined, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (variable display performance control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. The performance control CPU 120 may also select one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (operation section performance control patterns) in response to the operation section performance determined in step AKS202, and set it as the usage pattern. In addition, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the performance control timer setting section) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the decorative pattern or the like is started to vary on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (variable display performance control pattern) determined in step AKS203 can be transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby starting the variation of the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After the variable start setting has been made, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display and the like, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during the variable display (step AKS207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 12-8 shows an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. The performance control pattern includes a variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) and an operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B). The variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) includes control data used to control the execution of various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. The operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation unit performance.

The variable display performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, and end code. The performance control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the performance control process timer value, which is the stored value of the performance control process timer, and a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (performance time) of each performance operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, data indicating the timing of switching the performance control, etc., may be set in response to a specified control content or processing content, such as, for example, a specified performance control command being received from the main board 11, or a specified process being executed as a process for controlling a performance operation in the performance control CPU 120.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variable mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects etc. linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating the light emission drive mode of light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of light-emitting bodies during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes data indicating the performance operation mode corresponding to the detection of the player's action, such as the effective detection period during which the player's action, such as tilting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, pointing to the trigger button, or pressing the push button 31B, is effectively detected, and data specifying the control content of the performance operation when each action is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating, for example, the on period and drive mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all performance control patterns, and there may be performance control patterns that include some of the control data depending on the content of the performance action by each performance control pattern. Furthermore, for multiple types of process data included in a performance control pattern, the type of control data that makes up each process data may differ depending on the content of the performance action executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data that includes all of the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and there may be process data that includes some of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as movable body control data that indicates the operating state of the movable body 32.

In the variable display performance processing in step S172 of the performance control process processing, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, a determination is made as to whether it matches any of the performance control process timer judgment values, and if it does match, control of the performance operation is performed according to the various corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 proceeds with the control of the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, light-emitting elements such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) according to the contents of process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the performance control pattern. In addition, in each process data #1 to #n, the display control data #1 to #n, audio control data #1 to #n, lamp control data #1 to #n, operation detection control data #1 to #n, and vibration control data #1 to #n correspond to the performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n, and constitute the performance control execution data #1 to #n that indicate the control content of the performance operation in the performance device and specify the execution of performance control.

The operation unit performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, and vibration control data. The lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light-emitting body in the operation unit performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data that indicates the on period and drive mode of the vibration generating device in the operation unit performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131. In other words, the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-9 shows an example of the timing settings for the operation section performance in vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation section performance can be executed at the start of pre-change, corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the pre-change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, the operation section performance can be executed at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-change, depending on the remaining number of times. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT01, if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT02, and if the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT03.

The timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target change, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance can be executed at the start of the target change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, at some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the advance change, the operation unit performance is executed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times, and then at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times being "0". Also, at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance may be executed. Specifically, if one of the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit performance can be executed using the determined operation unit performance pattern at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change.

The timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be such that the operation unit performance can be executed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the operation unit performance can be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 12-9 are timings at which the operation unit presentation when a reach is established, when a reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification is triggered can be executed as operation unit presentations corresponding to the current variable display. For example, depending on the operation unit presentation pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, there are cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach develops, and cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT14 when a hit/miss notification is triggered. Specifically, if either operation unit presentation pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Also, if step AKS202 determines that either operation unit presentation pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT13, which is the time when the reach develops. Alternatively, if step ASK202 determines that operation unit presentation pattern AKC41 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time when the win/loss notification is triggered.

Figure 12-10 shows an example of control of the operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-10 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in Figure 12-10 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 12-10 (B). The light emission performance associated with this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-10 (A). During the off period of the vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 300 milliseconds.

Figure 12-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-11 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC02, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors by transitioning between red, red-purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange light colors according to the elapsed time and the light emission position. The light emission positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be specified as multiple sections, such as the top and bottom of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and it is sufficient that the light emission time, light emission color, and light emission brightness may be partially or entirely set according to each section.

Figure 12-12 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC11. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC11 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 12-12 (A) becomes white, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV02 shown in Figure 12-12 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 12-12 (B). The light emission presentation accompanying this vibration presentation is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in white in accordance with the on period of the vibration presentation, as shown in Figure 12-12 (A). In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically during the on-period of 1500 milliseconds, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds.

Figure 12-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC12 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC13 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode with an on period of 3000 milliseconds continuing as shown in Figure 12-13 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC12, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may periodically change the light emission brightness of red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with a high light emission brightness of red light and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 has a light emission mode that changes the light emission brightness in a shorter period than the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. In this way, the light emission performance may be performed in a different light emission period as well as a different light emission color, so that the reliability of a jackpot can be suggested. During the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternating between red light emission and non-emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light-emitting effect, the light emission cycle may be common, but the light emission color may be different to indicate the reliability of a jackpot. In this way, for example, when the light-emitting colors in the light-emitting effects are different, the light-emitting cycle may be common to reduce the control burden of the light-emitting effects.

Figure 12-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the performance AKR1 shown in Figure 12-14 (A) which is the performance when the reach is established at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-14 (B) becomes pink, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in Figure 12-14 (C). The performance AKR1 which is the performance when the reach is established may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a performance that displays a background image according to the reach establishment, or may be any other performance associated with the establishment of the reach. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds) as shown in Figure 12-14 (C). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in pink in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the OFF period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off.

Figure 12-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22. The operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, shown in Figure 12-15 (A), at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 12-15 (B) becomes orange, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV12 shown in Figure 12-15 (C). Presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, may be, for example, a presentation that displays a presentation image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a presentation that displays a background image according to the establishment of a reach, or may be any other presentation associated with the establishment of a reach. Presentation AKR1 and presentation AKR2, which are the presentations when a reach is established, may have different presentation forms. As shown in FIG. 12-15(C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is a vibration mode including an on period of the first vibration on time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) alternately repeated twice, followed by an on period of the second vibration on time (e.g., 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (e.g., 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In addition, when the on period of the vibration effect is a different vibration on time, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange continuously. In contrast, during the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently. During the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternate between emitting orange light and not emitting light every 20 milliseconds, thereby intermittently emitting orange light.

The operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the performances AKS1 and AKS2 when the reach develops, and include a light emission performance in which the light color becomes white, and a vibration performance by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC32, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS2. In both cases of operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the light emission performance associated with these vibration performances is that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the win/lose prompting performance at the timing AKT14 when the win/lose notification is prompted, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. The light emission performance accompanying this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 lighting up in gold in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect includes the case where the light emission color becomes white and the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03, which is different from vibration pattern AKV02, is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs when the light emission color becomes white and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that when the light emission color becomes red and when the light emission color becomes rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both cases. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32. In this way, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops have a common light-emitting color of white, and the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes are common, while the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the interest in the game. In addition, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 or AKC13. As in this case, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops may have different light-emitting modes and different vibration modes. As in the case where the light-emitting color becomes white, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is common to the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Also, as in the case where the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts may include a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is different from the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not have to include an illumination pattern of the illumination effect that is different from the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered include operation unit effects by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes gold in association with the vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV31. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered have a common jackpot reliability of 100%, and there are cases in which the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different. In addition, the light emission color and vibration pattern of the vibration effect are different between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the reliability of the big hit is the same, but the vibration pattern of the vibration effect or the light emission pattern of the light emission effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be increased.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white, red, or rainbow in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting patterns of the light-emitting patterns and the vibration patterns of the vibration effects differ between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section performance differs, the light emission mode of the light emission performance differs, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance differs, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, thereby increasing the interest in playing the game.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting state of the light-emitting state differs between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect differs. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light emission state of the light emission performance or the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a white light emission color. Also, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a pink or orange light emission color. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, even if the light emission state of the light emission performance is the same, the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT01 to AKT03 when the preliminary fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, the jackpot reliability is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing when the vibration performance is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration effect can be varied by varying the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity caused by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong and weak vibrations in vibration intensity, or any other vibration pattern that vibrates an operating member such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

The multiple specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the moving body operation, image display, music playback, or the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, the vibration performance by the operation unit performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach performance of SP Reach A, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state when executed is higher. The moving body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A are all executed as part of the reach performance, so they do not have individual jackpot reliability. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is a performance that definitely notifies that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type selection CH1, CH2 differ from effects with a high jackpot reliability, such as the reach effect of SP Reach A, in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, for a specific effect that has a high jackpot reliability among multiple specific effects, it is sufficient that the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the specific effect is executed. Also, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the vibration effect is not executed by the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-16 shows an example of the performance of effects achieved by illuminating the game effect lamps 9. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, multiple performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the mode of performance execution by illuminating the lights.

In performance execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to red in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In the performance execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in red to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors due to the illumination effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes an illumination effect in which the illumination color becomes rainbow in conjunction with the vibration effect.

In performance execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white display color from left to right, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated to change from black to white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated white by a lighting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a lighting effect in which the light color changes to white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In performance execution example AKF04, when the text display on the image display device 5 is blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in blue to match the text display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color becomes white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined performance by displaying background display, text display, or any other performance image on the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game, including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the performance processing during variable display executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing, the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting processing is used to control the execution of a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, such as the variable display. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. If an operation unit performance is executed during the execution of such a predetermined performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 can light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance in the operation unit performance. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the control data read from the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the execution of the operation unit performance. This control data includes lamp control data for controlling the emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. In response to the emission performance associated with the vibration performance in such an operation unit performance, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a different light emission mode from the light emission performance of the operation unit performance associated with a predetermined performance. In this way, by making the emission modes different between the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, the performance by light emission can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

The predetermined performance may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in a color that matches the audio output, such as background music, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in a color that matches the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound that is a message that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in red that matches the audio output, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in white by the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. Even in this way, by making the light-emitting modes of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A different from those of the other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N different, the light-emitting effects can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. The predetermined effect may be to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and make the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. non-illuminated (turned off). When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 12-17 shows an example of the setting of the performance period in which a specific linked performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in association with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in association with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects using vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with the playback of music in the reach effect of SP Reach A. The specific linked effects that can be executed in period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B changes from blue to red to gold in conjunction with the special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV43.

The period AKZ04 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific linked effects executable during period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B becomes rainbow-colored in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44. The jackpot confirmation notification may be any notification that allows the player to recognize a jackpot by stopping and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern that results in the display of a decorative pattern, displaying a performance image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach presentation, outputting a jackpot confirmation notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, turning on a jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these.

In addition, following the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, a specific link performance may be executed during the period AKZ04 associated with the big win confirmation notification. In this case, the specific link performance associated with the big win confirmation notification is executed while the operation unit performance heightens the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the impression of the performance and improving the interest in playing. When executing a specific link performance following such an operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance or the special vibration performance may be different between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance, or the light emission mode of the light emission performance or the specific light emission performance may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration performance and the special vibration performance. The light emission brightness may be different between the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance. By making the vibration mode and light emission mode different to give the performance a sharp contrast, the difference between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance can be easily recognized, the performance can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in playing can be improved.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes white in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes rainbow in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

Figures 12-18 to 12-20 show cases where the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Figure 12-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when a movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when an image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when a music is played in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the reach mode and the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position at the lower front end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the reach performance of the SP reach A is started by the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, as in the performance execution example AKG01, and the movable body operation is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linear movement or parallel movement upward from the initial position, and a performance image showing a message such as "SP reach A" is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part provided inside the movable body 32. After that, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the performance execution example AKG02. At this time, a performance image showing a message such as "This change is ..." is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part of the movable body 32.

As the position of the movable body 32 is changed, as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed along with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. Furthermore, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the performance execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ01 ends. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrates every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which no vibration occurs. Also, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that continuously lights up the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that switches between blue light (on) and no light (off) every 250 milliseconds.

When the movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a light pattern in which the light color and light brightness gradually change from bottom to top as the position of the movable body 32 is changed. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a blue light color and with a light brightness that changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time.

After the movable body operation is completed as in performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in performance execution example AKG11, as an image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. At this time, for example, text display showing the message "Super Hot" is displayed in a gold display color. Also, as in performance execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the text display.

In conjunction with the display of the performance image, which is an image display such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed in conjunction with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold during the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17. When the display of the text indicating the message ends and the display of the performance image in the reach performance different from the text display begins, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking performance in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the text display indicating the message "Super Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ02. Also, during period AKZ02, a specific light-emitting effect may be performed with the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B alternately repeating a first luminance with a high gold light emission brightness and a second luminance with a low light emission brightness every 10 milliseconds.

When image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, for example, to match the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 and the emission color of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of a performance image resulting in an image display such as performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, and when the display of a performance image such as performance execution example AKG13 begins, they may emit light of a color different from gold.

After the display of a performance image such as that in performance execution example AKG13 has begun, the sound of music phrase PH01 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A as in performance execution example AKG21. Next, the sound of music phrase PH02 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG22. After that, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG23. In this way, by outputting the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 in sequence as the performance progresses, it is possible to execute the overall music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

In conjunction with the output of sound that results in music playback as in performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific linked performance is executed, causing the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to vibrate and emit light. The specific linked performance executed in conjunction with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV43 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color changes from blue to red and then from red to gold during the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 12-17. In performance execution example AKG21, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes blue in response to the sound output of music phrase PH01. In performance execution example AKG22, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes red in response to the sound output of music phrase PH02. In performance execution example AKG23, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes gold in response to the sound output of music phrase PH03. In this way, it is possible to execute a specific light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to multiple colors as the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in sequence as the performance progresses.

Figure 12-21 shows a music playback execution example AKH01 in which the scales change in sequence as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in Figure 12-21 (A), during a period AKZ03 in which a specific linked performance can be executed in conjunction with music playback, sounds corresponding to the scales of Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Si, and Do are output by speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of Do output last needs to be one octave higher than the scale of Do output first.

Such a specific linked performance associated with music playback includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color changes as shown in FIG. 12-21(B) and a vibration performance in which the special vibration performance is based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 12-21(C), and can be executed during a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration performance shown in FIG. 12-21(C) is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. In the specific light-emitting performance associated with this special vibration performance, the light-emitting color of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 changes in sequence between blue, red, and gold in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration performance, as shown in FIG. 12-21(B). During the stop period of the sound output and the off period of the special vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may not emit light and may be turned off. Note that during the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting performance may be different for each scale. For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously illuminated in blue over a period corresponding to the scale of C that is first output. Next, during a period corresponding to the scale of D, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high red illumination luminance and a second luminance with a low red illumination luminance. After that, during a period corresponding to the scale of E, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between gold illumination (lit) and non-illumination (unlit). In this way, by providing illumination modes with different amounts of illumination for each illumination color corresponding to each scale, the presentation can be appropriately diversified and interest in the game can be increased.

The reach performance of SP Reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display performance control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is set to be able to execute a specific linked performance in association with a specific performance such as the movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A by the lamp control data and vibration control data. In the specific linked performance, a special vibration performance can be executed by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance by the vibration pattern in the operation unit performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation unit performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in association with the execution of the specific performance, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When an operation section performance is executed, a vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is accompanied by a light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a specific linked performance is executed, a specific light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is executed in conjunction with a special vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. By executing a performance that includes vibration and light emission of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, for example, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 will recognize the vibration and light emission of the operation members that are different from the image display, and the unexpectedness of the performance will be enhanced.

During the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movement of movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP Reach A. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect during the movement period of movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 12-17, in response to a confirmed jackpot notification, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific linkage effects include specific light emission effects in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 light up in association with a special vibration effect produced by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the operation unit effects and the specific light emission effects accompanying the special vibration effects in the specific linkage effects differ in terms of light emission patterns, such as light color. In this way, by making the light emission patterns different depending on the operation unit effects and the specific linkage effects, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, and the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are executed at different times and have different vibration patterns. In addition, the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the pre-variation, and the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are white, red, or rainbow, so that the light emission patterns of the light emission patterns are the same. In this way, by providing cases where the vibration patterns of the vibration effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different, while the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are the same, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, are executed in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the operation unit effects are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning time judgment result, which is the pre-reading judgment result. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit effects are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 12-10 and FIG. 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start of the pre-variation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the light emission color is white and when the light emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effects is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby appropriately diversifying the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increasing the interest in the game. Note that when the light emission color is red and when the light emission color is rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance patterns used to execute the continuous preview performance include operation unit performance patterns in which the light emission color of the light emission performance differs depending on whether the remaining number is other than "0" or "0". For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) includes an operation unit performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number is "1" and an operation unit performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number is "0". The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes white. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission mode is different between the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. In this way, by providing different lighting conditions for the lighting effects when the timing for executing the operation section effects differs, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance, the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is set to prevent the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large from being lower than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), if the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". If the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 or the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This prevents the operation unit performance with a low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation, etc., even though the operation unit performance with a high jackpot reliability was executed first at the start of the pre-variation, so that the player's expectations are not lowered and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white, and when the light emission color is white, light emission and non-emission are repeated in accordance with the on and off periods of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted continuously in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white. When the light emission color is white, light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03. Since the on period settings are different for the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission patterns, such as the light emission period of the light emission effects, are different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide cases where the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different.

(Modifications of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree. Regarding the specific linked effects, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any degree of advantage related to the game on the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such degree of advantage.

The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different and when it is common, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance is different and when it is common, when the jackpot reliability is different and when it is common, etc., can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of execution is different and when it is common between the operation unit performance and the specific linked performance, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance and the special vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance is different and when it is common, can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission performance by making the light emission mode of the light emission performance common. When the light emission modes of the light emission performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making the vibration mode of the vibration performance common. When some vibration modes in the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making other vibration modes in the vibration performance common. For example, if the vibration intensities in the vibration effects are different, the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by standardizing the vibration cycles in the vibration effects. If some of the light emission patterns in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing other light emission patterns in the light emission effects. For example, if the light emission colors in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing the light emission cycles in the light emission effects. The control burden can also be reduced by similar standardization for the vibration patterns of special vibration effects and the light emission patterns of specific light emission effects.

In addition to or instead of during execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a big win game state, the operation unit performance or the specific linked performance may be executable. For example, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of the V winning attacker opening, the opening time, the number of openings, or the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. When the game is controlled to a big win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the big win game state, the end condition, the presence or absence of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the big win game state, and the increase amount. Specific linked performance may be executed in conjunction with specific performances such as moving objects, image display, and music playback in the small win game state or the big win game state.

The specific effect capable of executing a specific linked effect may be any effect that can be executed in response to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, when a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a certain rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the specific linked effect may be executable during some or all of the effect period.

When controlled to any presentation state, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations. For example, when controlled to a presentation state that is a special presentation mode, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations at a higher rate than when controlled to a presentation state that is a presentation mode other than the special presentation mode.

The operating member capable of executing effects by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects the operation of a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects the touch operation or pressing operation on a touch panel. In addition, a sensor that can detect a predetermined motion by the player, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor, may be used. The motion of the player may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands, etc. using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can detect the predetermined motion of the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be used. In addition to such a motion detection member, a contact member that the player can contact with his/her hand, etc. may be provided, and the contact member may be vibrated or illuminated together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member.

The vibration effects included in the operation unit effects may correspond to the vibration effects in the characteristic part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the characteristic part 49AK, and the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects executable at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects executable at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation unit effects may correspond to the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the characteristic part 48AK, the light emission effects accompanying the predetermined vibration effects in the characteristic part 49AK, and the light emission effects accompanying the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01 to AKT03, which is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The special vibration effect included in the specific linked effect may correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving symbols may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of times that are predetermined depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
The gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, in the light colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be common between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common, for example, when the light emission color is white. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11 or AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing a vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute a visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect in accordance with the progress of a game, and the proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, and the vibration effect execution means can execute a special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the operation unit effect control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, the reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher rate of control to an advantageous state when a predetermined vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern. The different rate of control to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the use of the operation unit performance pattern. The ability to execute a special vibration performance may be, for example, execution of a vibration performance in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05. The different vibration modes between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be common when the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11, AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the different vibration mode may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., different from the vibration patterns AKV21, AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a predetermined vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing that is later than the first timing, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The execution of the predetermined vibration effect may have a higher rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the execution of the specific effect. Here, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation rate of 50% or more, which is higher than the execution of the reach effect of SP Reach A.
In such a configuration, the player's anticipation for the specified vibration effects can be heightened, improving his/her interest in the game.

The specific effect execution means may execute an effect of moving a movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect execution means may execute a special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notification of a confirmed jackpot, etc. The special vibration effect in response to this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44, etc.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The light emission effect execution means can execute a specific light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with a special vibration effect, and the light emission form may be different between the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emission effect associated with the special vibration effect. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission form may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, different from when the light emission color changes from blue or gold, or from blue to red and then to gold.
According to such a configuration, the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined in step AKS202.
According to this configuration, the vibration effects can be appropriately executed to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a first vibration effect and a second vibration effect as vibration effects that vibrate the operating means, and a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect, and the timing of execution of the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are different, and the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission performance may be, for example, the lighting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light emission performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is different according to the light emission state of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the timing of execution is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a pre-variation start timing AKT01 to AKT03 that is different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The fact that the vibration mode is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 that is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a case where the light emission color included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when the developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached the reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game includes a first light emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a second vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting performance associated with the second vibration performance, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing, and is capable of executing the second vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. The case where it is possible to execute the gaze guidance effect at the second timing may be, for example, the case of timing T3 or T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory may be, for example, a variable display that is a pre-variable.

The light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance includes a first vibration light emission mode and a second vibration light emission mode different from the first vibration light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the first vibration performance may be different when the light emission performance is performed in the first vibration light emission mode and when the light emission performance is performed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the first vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous performance pattern, the light emission color of the operation unit performance pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0".
In such a configuration, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each of the features 48AK to 50AK may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Another gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and includes an operation means (e.g., stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 and the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern) that can execute a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation unit performance pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 using vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates, and The present invention is provided with a light emitting effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 which executes the variable display effect process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (e.g., the light emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) for making the operation unit emit light in association with a constant vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 which executes the variable display effect process of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., the reach effect of SP reach A, the big win confirmation notification, the big win type lottery, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game, and the rate at which the game is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., the operation The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and is capable of executing the specified vibration effect at the timing when a variable display is started (for example, execution of a vibration effect in timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.), and the vibration form is different between the specified vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.), and further, a player may be moved to a play area in response to a player's operation. The gaming machine includes a launching means capable of launching a gaming medium, and a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to prompt a player to launch the gaming medium toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path along which the gaming medium can flow in the gaming area, the guidance message including a first guidance message and a second guidance message, and the guidance display means displays the second guidance message before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, displays the first guidance message after the name display of the advantageous state is completed and continues the second guidance message, and ends the first guidance message while continuing the second guidance message during a period after the predetermined period, and continues the second guidance message in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.

This configuration allows players to focus on the vibration patterns of the vibration effects, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects, and the timing of the vibration effects, thereby increasing interest in the game. In addition, the timing at which the vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, increasing interest in the game. Also, instructions that prompt the player to launch the game ball in a specific direction can be executed in an optimal manner.

In other words, it is possible to draw attention to the light emission mode with a high probability of controlling the predetermined vibration effect to the advantageous state, whether it is executed at the execution timing of the vibration effect, and whether a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect, thereby improving the interest in the game, and by emphasizing the instruction to launch the game ball in a specific direction with the first and second guidance displays during a specific period after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, and then instructing the game ball to be launched in the specific direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over the first guidance display, it is possible to avoid annoyance by not emphasizing the instructions too much, and further, it is possible to first display the second guidance display to modestly instruct the game ball to be launched in the specific direction, and then to make the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after the recognition, to firmly instruct the game ball to be launched in the specific direction with the first guidance display. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is likely to attract the interest of players when installed in a gaming facility and has easy-to-understand instructions on the direction in which the game ball should be launched in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in gaming and can suitably execute instructions that encourage the player to launch a gaming ball in a specified direction, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and is equipped with a launching means that can launch a gaming medium into a gaming area in response to the player's operation, and a guidance display means that uses an image display to display guidance that encourages the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the gaming medium can flow in the gaming area, and the guidance display The indication includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, displays the second guidance display before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, displays the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display after the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, and during a period after the predetermined period, ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed. An example of an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another example of the form.

<Explanation of characteristic part 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the characteristic feature 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 13-1 to 13-60.

[Configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F]
This is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 13-1, the pachinko game machine 1 according to this characteristic part 075F is provided with a special variable winning ball device 075F007A instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in Fig. 1. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Fig. 13-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a normal large winning opening) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a gaming ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When a gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23, a number of gaming balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 13-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning port, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning port, and the game ball can easily enter the V large winning port.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024 (see FIG. 13-4) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as the large prize opening. The large prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a number of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening, the pachinko game machine 1 also has an attacca upper lamp 075F009U provided above the attacca, a lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided to the right of the image display device 5, and a board left lamp 075F009E provided to the left of the image display device 5.

The movable body lamp 9d illuminates the characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example, "XXX") by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is stopped or in operation. The attacca lamp 9c illuminates the vicinity of the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The attacca upper lamp 075F009U illuminates the vicinity above the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D illuminates the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided on a housing imitating a character, and illuminates the housing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E illuminates the vicinity of the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The left board lamp 075F009E may be provided on a character-shaped housing, similar to the right board lamp 075F009F. The right board lamp 075F009F and the left board lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (left/right, up/down, etc.), similar to the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has multiple lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has frame lamps consisting of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Here, FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example).

The pachinko game machine 1 also has a special symbol LED board 075F020 at the bottom left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is a board that plays the roles of the first reserved indicator 25A, the second reserved indicator 25B, the regular reserved indicator 25C, the regular pattern indicator 20, the first special pattern display device 4A, and the second special pattern display device 4B shown in FIG. 1 by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. The pachinko game machine 1 also has a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120, and notifies the changes in the special symbol, the number of reserved symbols, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs.

Here, Figure 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 13-3(a), the special chart LED board 075F020 includes a special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 which indicates the variable display of the first special chart, a special chart 2 variable display unit 075F022 which indicates the variable display of the second special chart, a special chart 1 memory display unit 075F023 which indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special chart game, a special chart 2 memory display unit 075F024 which indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special chart game, a regular chart memory display unit 075F025 which indicates the regular chart reserved memory number, a regular chart display unit 075F026 which indicates the variable display of regular charts, a right hit display unit 075F030 which encourages the player to hit to the right, a special rate display unit 075F028 which indicates whether or not a special rate state is in effect, a time-saving display unit 075F029 which indicates whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, and a round display unit 075F027 which indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 075F020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 075F030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 075F030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball flows through the second flow path toward the second start winning hole or the large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole). In this embodiment, in the big win game after the big win occurs and in the game state after the big win game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right hit display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out and the right to the second special game can be obtained, or the game ball can enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during the round of the special jackpot, the V-large prize opening opens, and the player can enter the game ball into the V-large prize opening and gain the right to be controlled into the special jackpot state by hitting to the right while the display encouraging the player to hit to the right is being displayed. Therefore, hitting to the right while the display encouraging the player to hit to the right is being displayed can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 075F052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 075F053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 075F054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 075F055 that encourages the player to hit right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/going out using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F053 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing with a lighting means such as an LED. The special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing with a lighting means such as an LED. Hereinafter, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the first special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the change display of the first special symbol. Also, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the second special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the change display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 075F055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 13-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 13-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L is connected to a lamp control board 14 and can be lit (blinked) by control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. Each of these movable body lamps 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these lamps collectively, are also referred to as game effect lamps 9.

The fourth pattern unit 075F050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special chart LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
13-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 075F005D capable of displaying the first reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays, and a second reserved memory display area 075F005U capable of displaying the second reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 075F005J, which indicates that a special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the first and second reserved memory counts.

In the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 075F005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 075F005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 13-5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. For this reason, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 075F005F for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Jackpot type)
Fig. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. As shown in Fig. 13-6, the winning type table shows the winning probability after the end of the winning game state, the base after the end of the winning game state, the fluctuation time after the end of the winning game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the winning game for each type of winning in the winning game.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpots, 5R sure-win jackpots, and 10R sure-win jackpots. In the following, each round may be designated by "R". For example, the first round may be called the first round, and the second round may be called the second round. A 5R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker makes it difficult to win a V (for example, control that shortens the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning port to a specified time or control that does not allow the game ball to enter a specific area by repeatedly opening and closing the lid), and is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a normal jackpot, this low probability high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 100 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

A 5R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) inside the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port always open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

A 10R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port always open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability jackpot share the same decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability jackpot share the same fanfare presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs when the jackpot occurs, the presentation of the round presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs during the round of the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state are also shared. For this reason, it is difficult for a player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability jackpot has occurred, as long as they look at the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare presentation, and round presentation. Here, in the case of a 5R probability jackpot, the V large prize entry port opens in a specified round (in this embodiment, the 4th round). At this time, if the player can aim at the V-large winning hole and hit the ball to the right to get it into the V-large winning hole, the game state will be controlled to a special state.

As such, 5R normal jackpots and 5R special jackpots are also called chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a special jackpot has occurred until halfway through the round.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the V-large winning hole will open in a specified round (the 9th round in this embodiment) in the same way as in the case of a 5R special jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning hole by hitting it to the right, the game state will be controlled to a special jackpot state. However, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the fanfare presentation (for example, the background, the characters that appear, the sound effects, etc.), and the presentation style of the round presentation that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state are different from those of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R special jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a special jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R special jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 13-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 13-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not a hit is made. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by adding from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by adding from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the type of hit) that determines the type of hit as 5R normal hit, 5R variable hit, or 10R variable hit. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining the hit of a normal pattern) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern is generated. Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the initial value of Random 4) that determines the initial value of Random 4.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random R). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots, such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special jackpot, and a 10R special jackpot, that will be the jackpot game state is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 1). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 1.

First, a fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 3), and then one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 4). In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a normal reach, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the case of a miss, the fluctuation pattern types are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that does not involve a reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

These types of fluctuation pattern are set so that when the display result is incorrect, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern type differs between when the time-saving state is in effect and when the time-saving state is not in effect (when the time-saving state is in effect, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time, such as a normal fluctuation pattern type, is selected is set to be higher than when the time-saving state is not in effect), and therefore when the time-saving state is in effect, the fluctuation display time is shorter than when the time-saving state is not in effect.

These types of fluctuation patterns may be set to have different selection rates when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays a fluctuation is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, so that when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays a fluctuation is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the number of reserved memories may be reduced to reduce the fluctuation display time compared to when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. For example, in the state of the number of reserved patterns reduced, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time, such as a normal fluctuation pattern type, is selected may be set higher compared to when the number of reserved patterns reduced is not in the state of the control, so that the average time of the fluctuation display time is reduced compared to when the number of reserved patterns reduced is not in the state of the control. In addition, in the control of the number of reserved patterns reduced, the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation pattern type itself may be reduced even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected compared to when the number of reserved patterns reduced is not in the state of the control.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern may be determined in a one-step method in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by a single random number drawing, rather than in a two-step method in which the fluctuation pattern type is determined first and then the fluctuation pattern is determined.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
13-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 13-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the left column of FIG. 13-8(A) set as jackpot determination values, and the special jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the right column of FIG. 13-8(B) set as jackpot determination values. The special jackpot determination table has a larger number of jackpot determination values (called special jackpot determination values or second jackpot determination values) than the special jackpot determination table, by adding a special jackpot determination value specific to the special jackpot determination table to the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table (called normal jackpot determination values or first jackpot determination values). This allows the special jackpot state to be determined as a jackpot with a higher probability than the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of a random number (random R) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 13-8 (A), it decides to determine a jackpot for the special symbol (either a regular jackpot or a special jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 13-8 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

Figures 13-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. Figure 13-8 (B) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 13-8 (C) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8(B) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1 for jackpot type determination, and the jackpot determination values corresponding to "5R normal jackpot", "5R special jackpot", and "10R special jackpot" are set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and the jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R special jackpot".

As shown in Fig. 13-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to a "5R normal jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "1". The judgment value corresponding to a "5R special jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "10R special jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7". The special jackpot 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special jackpot 2 variable display unit 075F022 in the special jackpot LED board 075F020 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. Similarly, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth pattern unit 075F050 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to each jackpot pattern.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

According to these various jackpot type determination tables, for jackpots with the second special symbol, the percentage of "10R sure jackpot" selected is higher than for jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol, and the percentage of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player selected is higher.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 13-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 13-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. Note that, although "(H)" indicates hexadecimal in the following description, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8001 (H) or command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special pattern (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). In other words, when a unique number is assigned to each of multiple types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R special jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R special jackpot has been determined. The miss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R special jackpot designation command, and 10R special jackpot designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the changing of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies the initialization (specifies the display of the initial screen when the power is turned on) that is sent when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies the recovery from the power outage (specifies the display of the power outage recovery screen) that is sent when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state specification command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special probability state specification command that specifies the background of the special probability state. Each of the normal state specification command, time-saving state specification command, and special probability state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration specification command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R special jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot start 1 designation command, jackpot start 2 designation command, and jackpot start 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of a 5R special jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot end 1 designation command, jackpot end 2 designation command, and jackpot end 3 designation command, each of which, or collectively, are referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a start winning is made at the first or second start winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates whether or not a winning is made and the type of jackpot judgment result among the winning judgment results. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which range of judgment values the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within among the winning judgment results (fluctuation pattern type judgment result).

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be generated, the type of jackpot, and which range of judgment values the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern will fall within. Then, it sets a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F will be described. First, the process by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 13-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 13-10, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step 075FS001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set, which indicates that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, the customer waiting demo designation command is controlled not to be sent again based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 judges whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Also, when the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120, based on the value of the reserved memory number counter pointed to by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step 075FS009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads out Random R (random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figure 13-8) with the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot, and if they match, determines that there is a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining whether or not there is a jackpot.

In the process of determining a jackpot, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is not in a probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table with the values on the right side of FIG. 13-8(A) set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table with the values on the left side of FIG. 13-8(A) set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 13-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to set the stopped symbol in the special symbol as a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 075FS011), proceed to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number (random R) for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8 (C) are selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-8 (B). Additionally, when the special symbol pointer is pointing to "2nd," the CPU 103 selects the table for determining the type of the second special symbol jackpot shown in FIG. 13-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013, determines the jackpot type and jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 13-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern is set so that the jackpot pattern differs for each jackpot type, and the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined simultaneously, so that the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, preventing the game control from becoming complicated.

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, if the jackpot type is a "5R normal jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "01". If the jackpot type is a "5R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "02". If the jackpot type is a "10R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "03".

Next, the CPU 103 sets the stopping symbol for the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol, is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R normal jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "1". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "3". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "10R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "7".

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step 075FS017) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 13-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 13-11, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a miss fluctuation pattern type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads out random 2 (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the fluctuation pattern type to one of a plurality of types by referring to the selected table.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (S112) (step 075FS105).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 13-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation process. As shown in Fig. 13-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S113) (step 075FS203). When the variation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 13-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 13-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 (step 075FS301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the big win flag is set (step 075FS303). If the big win flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, it transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

Also, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in all 1R to 5R, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In the case of a 5R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 4th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In addition, in the case of a 10R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 9th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag indicating the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time-saving state has ended, and the time-saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display that results in a miss display occurs a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time-saving counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process transitions to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability variable flag indicating the probability variable state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variable flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315) and proceeds to step 075FS316. If the probability variable flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process of step 075FS314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step 075FS315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
13-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 13-14, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (for example, data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306) (step 075FS405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening processing (S115) (step 075FS406), and ends the processing.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
13-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 13-15, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step 075FS502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (step 075FS503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 075F024 is on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the high probability variable flag is set (step 075FS506). The high probability variable flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled into the high probability variable state when a V win occurs. If the high probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the high probability variable flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V win switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V win switch 075F024 is not on (N in step 075FS507), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability change determination flag is set (step 075FS508), a probability change determination device pass command is sent (step 075FS509), and processing proceeds to step 075FS510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V large prize opening (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
13-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 13-16, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the release number counter is 0 or not (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process ends.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of one round to the start of the next round (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V large prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the big win opening is in progress (step 075FS610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big win opening processing (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 13-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 13-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the large prize opening control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the high probability flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the high probability flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step 075FS710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), then in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in the time-saving state (step 075FS705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Performance processing during big win)
Next, the processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 13-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance processing during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 13-18, in the performance processing during a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and are erased at a predetermined timing such as when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot end command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). If the process timer has timed out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 075FS656). In addition, control of the performance device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed according to the contents of the process data set next (step 075FS657). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the performance during the round on the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/flashing/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. Also, to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output sound, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the presentation devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) continues according to the contents of the set process data (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the performance control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance under the control of the performance device. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 to encourage the player to hit right.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command (A1 series command) to designate the opening of the big prize opening from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of a big win, it sets process data corresponding to the mid-round performance in order to execute the mid-round performance under the control of the performance device, as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R normal jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V-type probability variation indication effect that indicates whether or not the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R normal jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify when the jackpot has started that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing an indication corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V-type probability variation indication effect).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V special jackpot suggestion performance (see FIG. 13-41). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V special jackpot suggestion performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the third round of a five round probability jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance (see FIG. 13-42) that notifies the player that the next fourth round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a five round probability jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, the third round) based on the command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V notice performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A203 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R sure-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 sets process data for executing the "Aim for V" performance (see FIG. 13-43) that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R sure-variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 3R) based on the command to specify after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command), and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the specified post-round during the jackpot. The "Aim for V" performance is a guide display using an image display related to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V presentation, an image is displayed that encourages the player to hit to the right to launch the game ball toward the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V presentation, an image may be displayed that points to the V large prize opening itself, which is a specific area, an image may be displayed that points to the vicinity of the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed that points to the path to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4th round of a 5R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 13-44). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 4th round) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, the Aim for V performance).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A108 command) to specify the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance that notifies the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the opening of the large prize opening that it has already received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 8th round) based on the command (A108 command) to specify the round of the jackpot, and sets process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V notice performance) that corresponds to the identified round of the jackpot.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command (A208 command) specifying after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a "Aim for V" presentation that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the already received command specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 8R) based on the command specifying after the opening of the large prize opening (A208 command), and sets process data for executing a presentation corresponding to the end of the round during the specified jackpot (in this case, the "Aim for V" presentation).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9th round of a 10R special jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the "Aim for V" performance. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 9R) based on the command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during a jackpot round, it sets process data corresponding to the V winning presentation in order to execute the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 4th round of a 5th round probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see Figure 13-44).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00) to specify passing through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 9R of a 10R probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance.

In addition, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, it sets process data for executing an ending presentation (see Figures 13-46 and 13-47) that indicates the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data based on the performance control commands received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the performance devices such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9 to execute various performances.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, but the following will particularly explain the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits with the left hand to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. When the result of the first special game is that the special game 1 variable display unit 075F021 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game include a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special chance jackpot, and a 10R special chance jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050, for example, lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (for example, five times for a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening continues until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V large prize entry port opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, there will be no V prize. Also, since there will be no V prize, the Aim for V performance will not be executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round will be displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V special probability suggestion performance is executed, which suggests whether or not there is a special probability jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special probability suggestion performance, it is announced that it is a normal jackpot, not a special probability jackpot. After that, the V large prize entry port opens in the 4th round, but no V prize occurs, and then in the 5th round, the normal large prize entry port opens, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is executed.

In the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect is executed, which announces that the next 4th round is a V opening round. In the 4th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 5th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 8th round, a V notice effect is executed, which announces that the next 9th round is a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 10th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times for a 5R normal jackpot, 150 times for a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot). Furthermore, in the case of a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to the special jackpot state for a predetermined number of times (150 times) of times that are controlled to the time-saving state. In other words, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a low-probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R special jackpot or a 10R special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a high-probability high base state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always prompted to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) compared to the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) compared to the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game compared to the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. As a result of the second special game, when the special game 2 variable display section 075F022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the type of jackpot in the second special game is the 10R guaranteed jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Because it is a 10R sure-win jackpot, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big prize opening is only open in the 9th round. Specifically, like the first win, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round that follows, a V notice performance is executed, notifying the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V big prize opening is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This grants the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a sure-win state. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, an ending performance is executed.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. For this reason, even if consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends after the first hit, and even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends for that consecutive hit, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
With reference to Fig. 13-19 to Fig. 13-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F will be described. Fig. 13-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. Fig. 13-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. Fig. 13-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Fig. 13-19 to Fig. 13-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 13-19, at t1, when the first special symbol game starts with the game ball entering the first start winning hole, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying decorative symbols in response to the change in the first special symbol, and for executing a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the first special symbol.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D and updates the lighting state of the special pattern 1 memory display unit 075F051 by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies that the special pattern will start to change based on the pattern change specification command, and sets the start timing of the performance. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result specification command, and determines the corresponding decorative pattern. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 also sets the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of a reach, etc.), and the content of the performance during the variable display of the decorative pattern (type of reach performance, etc.) based on the variation pattern specification command.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the special symbol fluctuation stop, at t3 thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a fanfare performance and lights up lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for displaying an image congratulating the jackpot on the image display device 5 as a fanfare performance, and outputting a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image encouraging right-hitting on the image display device 5 as a right-hit promotion performance, and outputs a sound encouraging right-hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 13-20, when the big win round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big win opening and sends a big win opening open command (A101 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the first round.

After that, when the first round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the second round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the second round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 13-41) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when the second round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the third round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the third round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V preview performance (see FIG. 13-42) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command).

After that, when the third round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance from after the third round to the fourth round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 13-43) based on the command (A203 command) to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 13-42) and then the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 13-43) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when a V win occurs at t11, the CPU 103 sends a command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify passage of the probability change determination device. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V win performance (see FIG. 13-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (A3 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending performance.

After that, the game is controlled to a high probability state and a time-saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the performance control command depending on whether the number of reserved memories exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, if the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying the decorative patterns in response to the change in the second special pattern, and for executing a performance during change (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the second special pattern.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 13-60) that allows the player to identify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image of the initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or small pattern on the image display device 5, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 13-60, and may be any performance that allows the player to identify that no game is being played, such as a character image or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1.

[Lamp lighting status]
Fig. 13-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting state of the lamps. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, right panel lamp 075F009F, left panel lamp 075F009E, right frame lamp 075F009R, left frame lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in a black-painted state as shown in Fig. 13-22 (A) when each of them is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in a white-painted manner as shown in Figure 13-22 (B) when they are lit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are each shown as being lit/blinking/off in a manner corresponding to the performance and the background displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in the hatched form in Figure 13-22 (C).

[Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, a description will be given of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game. Figures 13-23 to 13-33 and 13-38 to 13-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(a), when a losing symbol stops due to the variation of the special symbol in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the variation of the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or executes a variation-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each of the performances in Fig. 13-23(b1) to Fig. 13-24(b3) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the performances performed between Fig. 13-23(b1) to Fig. 13-24(b3) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 13-23(b2), in the event of a jackpot variation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 13-24(b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stop of the special symbol fluctuation, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-24(c1) to FIG. 13-38(d2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command) and the right-hit display lighting command (FD command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-24(c1) to FIG. 13-38(d2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

Here, the fanfare effect will be explained in detail. The fanfare effect is divided into multiple effect parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a celebration part, a name display part, and a right-hit promotion part. The celebration part is an effect part in which an effect to celebrate a jackpot is executed, and as described later in FIG. 13-24 (c1), an image celebrating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode celebrating the jackpot. The name display part is a presentation part that informs the player that a jackpot round is about to start by announcing the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred, and also informs the player of the type of jackpot game state that has occurred. As described later in Fig. 13-24 (c2) and (c3), a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of a jackpot. The right hit promotion part is a presentation part that encourages the player to hit right, and as described later in Fig. 13-24 (c4) to Fig. 13-33 (c29), a big right hit promotion presentation is executed that encourages the player to hit right using image displays of letters and figures. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot pattern has stopped and been determined, and then starts a fanfare performance based on the command (A0 series command) for starting the jackpot received from the CPU 103, and continues the fanfare until the normal jackpot opening opens and the jackpot round begins.

As shown in FIG. 13-24(c1), as the congratulatory part in the fanfare performance, an image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the player on the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting state congratulating the player on the big win. In addition, as a right-hit promotion performance, a small right-hit promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The image display device 5 has multiple layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 13-24(c1), the image consisting of a figure and text in the small right-hit promotion performance is displayed on a layer on the front side (toward the player as seen from the pachinko game machine 1) of the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!"). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound encouraging right-hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-hitting promotion performance, the lighting state of the right-hitting display unit 075F030 and the right-hitting display unit 075F055 changes to a state encouraging right-hitting (lighting in this example). The start order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD system command), and lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F055 based on the received right-hitting display lighting command (FD system command), while displaying an image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-hitting promotion performance and an image celebrating the jackpot based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image celebrating the big win. That is, first, the lamps of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 are turned on in this order, and then the images consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the image celebrating the big win are displayed in this order. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 are performed until the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. At that time, first, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display unit 075F055 based on the received right hit display off designation command, while ending the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and displaying the normal background image on the image display device 5 based on the received background designation command. Note that the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance coincides with the lighting period by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, making it easier for the player to understand the period for hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare performance, a part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "CHANCE" from the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13-25(c3), as the name display part in the fanfare performance, following FIG. 13-24(c2), the remaining part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "BONUS!!" from the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right hit promotion performance that is executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare performance that starts from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 13-24(c4) to FIG. 13-33(c29), a big right hit promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed large in the center of the image display device 5 as a right hit promotion performance.

Here, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIG. 13-34 to FIG. 13-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs guidance light emission to encourage the player to hit the right by moving the light-emitting part of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In this embodiment, the light-emitting part literally refers to the part that is emitting light, for example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the other lamps that are not lit (i.e., the lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the light-emitting part. Note that in other examples, the light-emitting part refers to the part that is emitting light with high brightness, for example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light-emitting part is not called the light-emitting part. Below, we will explain in detail how the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting (light emission control) of various lamps.

Figure 13-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. As shown in Figure 13-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the performance time of each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is specified for each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the movable body lamp 9d, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, the board left lamp 075F009E, the board right lamp 075F009F, and the attacca lamp 9c. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is set to perform a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, the big right hit promotion effect is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), so the game effect lamp 9 will repeat the 2000 msec big right hit promotion effect twice.

Figure 13-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in Figure 13-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, the time for each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

Here, for the big right hit promotion effect, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L are assigned a common grandchild table W11. In addition, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, and the board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild tables are provided. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 as much as possible. For the attacca lamp 9c, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, 2000 msec, is further divided into multiple periods, and multiple grandchild tables are assigned. For example, grandchild table A11a is assigned to 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is assigned to 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is assigned to 320 msec.

Figures 13-36 and 13-37 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. Figure 13-36 shows data in grandchild table W11 for frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in Figure 13-36, in grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is specified over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further data is specified for all lamps to be off (0x000000) at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that in the grandchild table, data for lamps 1 to 11 as shown in Figure 13-2 is specified for each of frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. Also, in FIG. 13-36, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, dashed circles are added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T2, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T3, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T4, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6, At T3 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T7 the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T10 the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T11 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After lighting begins, each lamp continues to light up while changing color to form seven colors. After that, first, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T49, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T50, and then the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T51. The third lamp of 075F009R is turned off, then the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T52, then the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T53, then the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T54, then the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T55, then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, the time used to turn the lights on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec left, but to ensure that the remaining time is completely turned off, the final time to turn the lights off is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off for the entire time.

When the grandchild table W11, which stores the above-mentioned data, is used, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), the frame lamps will light up in seven colors, starting with the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L and going from the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R in an arch shape from the left to the right. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamps will be performed twice.

Figure 13-37 shows data in grandchild table K11 for movable body lamp 9d and grandchild tables A11a to A11c for attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 13-37, grandchild table K11 for movable body lamp 9d specifies RGB data over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further specifies data for all lamps to be off (0x000000) at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that grandchild table K11 specifies data for the left X (left X), middle X (middle X), and right X (right X) of the character "XXX" attached to movable body 32 for movable body lamp 9d. Also, in FIG. 13-37, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, a dashed circle is added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T4, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T5. After starting to turn on, each lamp continues to turn on while changing color to seven colors. Then, first, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Then, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. That is, the time spent turning it on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is completely turned off, the final turn-off time is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Also, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (i.e., it remains off for the first T1 and T2), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

As shown in Fig. 13-25(c4) to Fig. 13-32(c24), when the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored is used, the movable body lamp 9d goes out while the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L are on, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out, and then each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. As a result, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in seven colors, starting with the lighting of the left X, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp, drawing an arch from the left side to the right side. This kind of big right hit promotion performance by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

Figure 13-37 also shows the data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 13-37, in the grandchild table A11a for the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 330 msec that is the target for lighting, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified at 20 msec intervals for the 1350 msec that is the target for lighting. However, since the attacca lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over the 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one color change pattern. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of the 1350 msec to repeat the color changes in the predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the Attacka lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 320 msec that is the target time for turning the lamp on, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, then causes the attacca lamp 9c to repeat color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to the grandchild table A11b multiple times at 280 nsec intervals for 1,350 msec, and then turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the final 320 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24), the frame lamps light up in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R reaches the vicinity of the attacca, and then the attacca lamp 9c lights up, and then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out, and then the attacca lamp 9c goes out. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the attacca lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacca lamp 9c, where the lamp is initially turned off, a predetermined color pattern is repeated in the middle, and then the lamp is turned off again, the lighting of the attacca lamp 9c is divided into three stages and a scenario is created. For the repetition of the predetermined color pattern in the middle, the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referenced. This eliminates the need to prepare data for the entire 2000 msec lighting period from start to finish, and only the data for the repeated portion is required. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 13-25 (c4), we will now explain the presentation mode of the big right hit promotion presentation executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L begins to light up. In line with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right hit promotion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 13-25 (c5), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c6), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c7), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c8), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c9), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c10), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c11), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c12), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c13), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c14), an arrow image pointing to the right continues to be displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c15), the image display device 5 displays the character image "Right" superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacca lamp 9c, the attacca lamp 9c starts to light up. From that point on, the attacca lamp 9c repeatedly lights up and goes out (i.e., it flashes). In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "Right" superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In addition, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the flashing attacca lamp 9c also goes out. Sound output from speakers 8L and 8R also stops. This ends the first series of big right-hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion effect starts. At this time, of the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Note that during the second big right hit promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are designed not to output sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion effect. This prevents the background music during the big hit round (sound corresponding to the background of the big hit round) from overlapping with the sound during the big right hit promotion effect when the transition occurs during the big hit round after the big right hit promotion effect has ended.

As shown in Figure 13-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hit promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks/goes off in the same manner as in the first big right hit promotion performance, and during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in the manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

In this way, the big right hit promotion effect uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right hit promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit to the right in a more emphatic manner than the small right hit promotion effect. Therefore, by executing the big right hit promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound (for example, a whirring sound effect) is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, effectively encouraging the player to hit to the right, while during the second big right hit promotion performance, a sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, so as not to interfere with the background music during the big win round that starts afterwards.

In addition, in the big right hit promotion effect, the arrow image and the letter image are displayed so that they gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage the player to hit to the right, and this effect is more flashy than the effect that displays the name image of the big win game state shown in Figure 13-24 (c2). For example, the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect appear one by one, but all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state appear at once. Also, the size of the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect is larger than all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state. Furthermore, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect that displays the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big win game state is displayed to notify the player that a big win has occurred, the big right hit promotion effect can more emphasize the player to hit to the right.

The attacca lamp 9c is the point that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and flashes to draw the player's attention to the point that they are aiming at. Note that the attacca lamp 9c may also be constantly lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without flashing.

In the following example, the presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R special jackpot occurs is explained. For a 10R special jackpot, the number of rounds is different, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot. Also, for a 5 regular jackpot, it is different in that the V preview presentation and V winning presentation are not executed, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right hit promotion effect ends, the switch to the big win round starts as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c27). Specifically, the arrow image and the text image "Hit right!!" fade out, gradually decreasing visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 turns white. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. Note that, as mentioned above, a series of performance data up to the stage of FIG. 13-38 (c28) is set based on the big win start designation command (A0 series command).

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is in progress. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the round-in-progress effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the round-in-progress effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data for each effect in FIG. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIG. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-40 (e4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d3), the entire screen of the image display device 5 goes completely white, and then the background image during the big win round fades in to appear. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that corresponds to the fade-in. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, we will explain "fade in" and "fade out" in more detail. Fade in and fade out are a type of image display effect called a "transition." A "transition" is a switching effect that is inserted between a first cut (image) and a second cut (image) when editing video and the scene changes from the first cut to the second cut (image). In addition to fade in and fade out, transitions also include various techniques used in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (such as a background or character) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific technique, fade-in changes the transparency (also called transmittance) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a specified period of time. For example, if the specified period is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 100% (first degree) to 50% over the 1 second period between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 0% (second degree) over the next 1 second period between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, fade-in is not a technique that does not gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) over a certain period of time, such as a technique that changes an object (image) to opaque by switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) in one go. Note that if opacity (which can also be called opacity) is changed instead of transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned percentage values are reversed. In other words, fade-in changes the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%), which is higher than the second degree, over a certain period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (such as a background or a character) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific technique, in fade out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed over a predetermined time from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) that is higher than the first degree. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 0% (second degree) to 50% over one second between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 100% (first degree) over one second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, a technique that does not gradually change the transparency (transmittance) over a predetermined time, such as a technique that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) in one go to make the object (image) transparent, is not a fade out. In addition, when changing opacity (opacity) instead of transparency (transmittance), the fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-38(c26) and (d1), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the text image "Hit right!!" is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%, so that the arrow image and the text image "Hit right!!" are gradually made transparent and difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-38(d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is located further back than the first layer of the screen, is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-38(d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually decreased to 0%, so that the background image during the jackpot round is gradually made opaque and easy to see (fade in). This allows the player to see the background image during the jackpot round on the first layer, which is located in front of the second layer of the screen.

Note that there is also a technique called "cross-fade" as a transition. Cross-fade is a technique in which, for example, a first layer of a screen showing some kind of object is faded out while a second layer of a screen showing some kind of object located behind the first layer is faded in, so that the first layer of the screen is shown first and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that a white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located behind is shown once during the switch from the image in the ED first period to the image in the ED second period, which is different from a technique like cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the background image is switched as in the transition described above, the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the background image switching. Here, "affected by the background image switching" means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by the player being unable to completely see the image of the small right hit promotion effect due to the background image switching such as fading in or out, or by the player being able to see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion effect but being unable to understand the meaning of the image (promotion of a right hit). On the other hand, if the phenomenon described above does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the background image switching.

As shown in FIG. 13-39(d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. 13-39(e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opening opens and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance. In addition, as mentioned above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right hit promotion performance has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e2), during the first round, a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e3), when the first round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e4), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance displayed in the upper right.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the second round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-41 (e5) to FIG. 13-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-41 (e5) to FIG. 13-42 (e8) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), when the second round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, an image encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed with the text image "PUSH!!" superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is still displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B during the V-type probability variation indication effect, a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect, to notify the player that a V-type probability variation jackpot has been obtained. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e8), when the second round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e9), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A103 command) to the presentation control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the third round based on the command from the CPU 103. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in FIG. 13-42 (e10) to FIG. 13-43 (e12) based on the command (A103 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between FIG. 13-42 (e10) to FIG. 13-43 (e12) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10), when the third round begins, the regular big prize opening opens and the V preview performance is executed. Specifically, a character image and a text image saying "Grab a V in the next round!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance. In addition, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e11), during the third round, the V preview performance continues, and a text image of "Grab a V in the next round!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a character image, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e12), when the third round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening opens. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "Aim for V" performance in the rounds from after the third round to the fourth round, based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), the Aim for V performance is executed while the large prize opening remains closed between rounds, i.e., the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening. Specifically, an arrow image pointing to the V variable prize ball device 075F007B (V large prize opening), which is the target (location) that the player is to aim at by hitting with the right, and a text image saying "Aim" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with a background image corresponding to the round performance. In this way, according to the Aim for V performance, the image display related to the V large prize opening can be used to encourage the player to hit with the right to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance).

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A104 command) to the presentation control CPU 120. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in Figures 13-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the special prize opening command (A104 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between Figures 13-44 (e14) and 13-44 (e15) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large prize opening opens and the Aim for V effect is then executed. This allows the player to aim for the V large prize opening by hitting to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), during the 4R, the Aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect).

When a game ball enters the V large winning hole and a V win occurs, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-44 (e16) to FIG. 13-45 (e18) based on the command to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-44 (e16) to FIG. 13-45 (e18) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, an image of a "V" indicating that a V winning has occurred is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round effect, and then an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e18), between rounds, the V large prize opening and the normal large prize opening remain closed, and an image of the letter "V" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A105 command) to the presentation control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in FIG. 13-45 (e19) to FIG. 13-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between FIG. 13-45 (e19) to FIG. 13-46 (e21) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e20), during the 5th round, a mid-round performance is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the large prize opening normally closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the time after the large prize opening is opened. The performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command. Furthermore, at a specified timing thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a command (A3 command) to specify the end of the jackpot to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes an ending performance based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-46 (f1) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) based on the command (A3 command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 13-46 (f1) and FIG. 13-47 (f4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1), when the ending performance starts, an image that allows the player to select a stage in the probability variable state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image indicating the name of the special state (in this example, a text image of "Yume Yume RUSH!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 together with a character image. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f3), during the ending performance, an addiction prevention notification performance is executed. Specifically, an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to become addicted. Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation," is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for encouraging a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. In addition, when a consecutive win occurs, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of winning balls) in the jackpot game state is displayed, for example, at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but such a game result image may also be displayed during the ending performance even when a first win occurs.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f4), a forget-to-remove prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to remove cards related to the game that the player owns, such as prepaid cards or membership cards. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending performance is finished, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative pattern in response to the change of the second special pattern based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special pattern. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance in Figure 13-48 (g1) and (g2) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, the performances that take place between Figure 13-48 (g1) and (g2) progress over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. Sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol stops and the losing symbol is displayed. At this time, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol.

After the second special symbol stops changing, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change of the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in Figure 13-48 (g3) to Figure 13-49 (g5) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), symbol change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 13-48 (g3) and FIG. 13-49 (g5) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. The speakers 8L and 8R also output sounds in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during a jackpot fluctuation. The group preview performance is a performance in which objects such as characters appear gradually or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5 to make the visibility of the reach pattern difficult, and then the objects disappear to make a specific pattern arrangement (for example, 777) appear. Even if a preview performance that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the performance image. Here, "affected by the display of the performance image" means that the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion performance is hindered or reduced by the display of a performance image such as a group preview, such that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right hit promotion performance, or the player can see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion performance but cannot understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion), and the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the display of the effect image.

When the special symbol stops changing, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R guaranteed jackpot) occurs as a result of the special symbol stopping, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that since the right-hit promotion performance has already been executed, the right-hit display lighting command (FD command) is not sent. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on a command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image celebrating the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yay!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the big win is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state celebrating the big win. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), after the fanfare effect starts, a name image (in this example, a text image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of a consecutive win on a special chart 2, since the big right hit promotion effect has already been executed when a special chart 1 was hit, the big right hit promotion effect is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-32 (c24), the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and furthermore, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect for the first round.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (i1), when the first round of the big win begins, the normal big prize opening opens, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as the V preview effect, the Aim for V effect, and the V prize are executed during the round as shown in Fig. 13-40 to Fig. 13-46, and when the big win round ends, an ending effect is executed as shown in Fig. 13-46 and Fig. 13-47. Then, as shown in Fig. 13-48, the game is again controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state. During this series of games, an image (arrow and letters) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each continue to light up. When the probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, the CPU 103 sends a right-hit display off command to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-hit promotion performance in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and turns off the right-hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. This allows the player to hit left again in the normal state.

[Presentation of the Pachinko Game Machine 1 When Power is Restored from an Outage]
Fig. 13-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the power is restored from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1. The power outage shown in Fig. 13-51 assumes power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare presentation as shown in Fig. 13-20 and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 13-51, if a power outage occurs in any of the following states: an image congratulating a player on a big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-24(c1) state); a name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, a text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-24(c2) state); only an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-28(c14) state); and a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect (FIG. 13-31(c23) state), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A101 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A101 command) is received, the performance image during 1R, such as that shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A101 command). In addition, all of the images, such as the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, the character image and the text image "Congratulations!!"), the name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!"), the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, and the text image "Hit right!!" added to the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion effect is executed or before the big right hit promotion effect is completed, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the point when the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the regular big prize opening.

Figure 13-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the first round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-52 assumes power outage 2, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-20.

As shown in Figure 13-52, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance during round 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-40 (e2)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the CPU 120 receives the command, it displays a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), on the image display device 5 based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. If prize balls are obtained during the subsequent rounds, the points can be added again starting from 0pt, for example, by adding 10pt for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to being displayed as 0pt after the power is restored, and the points can be made unclear by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 13-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the round after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-53 assumes power outage 3, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after one round, as shown in Figure 13-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-53, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-40 (e4)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A102 command) is received, the performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0 points, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 2nd round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-54 assumes power outage 4, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-20.

As shown in Figure 13-54, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the V-variable indication effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-41 (e7)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 13-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-55 assumes power outage 5, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between two rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 13-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-55, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the second round is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 13-42 (e9)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of a pachinko gaming machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-56 assumes power outage 6, which occurs when the power supply to pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds three rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 13-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-56, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the round after the third round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-43 (e13)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A104 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during the 4R based on the command (A104 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, because the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, because the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V performance as shown in Figure 13-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A104 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute the Aim for V performance as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the V big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-57 assumes power outage 7, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-21.

As shown in Figure 13-57, if a power outage occurs when an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-44 (e15)), or when an image corresponding to the V winning presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5R, such as that shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect is executed from the point when the power is turned on after that, so the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored from the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right and not being able to enter the normal big prize opening in the next round. Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs while the Aim for V effect and the small right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as in the 4th round, and in the case where a power outage occurs while the small right hit promotion effect and the large right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as shown in the above-mentioned Figure 13-51, both have in common that after the power is restored from the power outage, the Aim for V effect and the large right hit promotion effect are not executed, but the small right hit promotion effect is executed to the very least. Therefore, in both situations, the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored in a common manner.

Figure 13-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot on special chart 1. The power outage shown in Figure 13-58 assumes power outage 8, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds four rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 13-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-58, if a power outage occurs during the rounds after the 4th round when an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-45 (e18)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-59 assumes power outage 9, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-21.

As shown in Figure 13-59, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the mid-round performance during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 13-46 (e20)), or while the 5th round has ended (as shown in Figure 13-46 (e21)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end command (A3 system command), it displays a presentation image corresponding to an ending presentation such as that shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1) on the image display device 5 based on the jackpot end command (A3 system command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so that the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to make a right hit as much as possible.

Figure 13-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending presentation and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-21.

As shown in FIG. 13-60, if a power outage occurs during any of the ending effects, when an image that allows the player to select a stage in the high probability state after a jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-46(f1)), when a name image showing the name of the high probability state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with a character image (the state of FIG. 13-47(f2)), when an image corresponding to the addiction prevention notification effect and a game result image showing the game result in the jackpot game state are displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-47(f3)), or when a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-47(f4)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

After that, if there are reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives these commands, it displays a performance image corresponding to the change of the special pattern as shown in Figure 13-48 (g1) on the image display device 5 based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command).

On the other hand, if there are no reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and upon receiving these commands, it restores the display on the image display device 5 with the initial pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern and small pattern "123") stopped based on the background designation command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to win in the second start winning slot in the special probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Major effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature portion 075F described above are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) and (d2), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, while the game medium is in a state in which it is impossible for the game medium to enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is performed and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes to a state in which the game medium can enter the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 13-51 and FIG. 13-57).

(1-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round preceding the round in which the specific area can be entered, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), a portion in which an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of an attacker corresponding to a round preceding the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 13-51 and FIG. 13-57).

(1-3) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
Then, by receiving a 1R open command (for example, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open (A101 command)), the first information display is terminated while the second information display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right hit suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Then, by receiving a command after the end of the third round (for example, a command specifying after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for designating the opening of the large prize opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), a portion for continuing the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V-pass command (for example, a probability change determination device pass command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 13-51 and FIG. 13-57).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent games, and thereafter, the large right hit promotion effect is terminated while the small right hit promotion effect is continued as it is, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, the "Aim for V" effect for aiming at the V large prize winning hole is executed from the point when the V large prize winning hole is still closed, and is continued even after the V large prize winning hole is opened, so that the importance of aiming at the V large prize winning hole is appealed to the player, and it is possible to ensure that the game ball enters the V large prize winning hole. In addition, by terminating the "Aim for V" effect after the V large prize winning hole is closed due to the occurrence of the V prize winning, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right hit promotion effect is continuously executed, so that the player can be always encouraged to hit the right even before the V large prize winning hole is opened and after the V prize winning occurs. This allows the instruction to the player to hit to the right to be executed in an optimal manner. In addition, in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, and in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after the power is turned on, so that even if a power outage occurs, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right in subsequent games at the very least.

(2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by a presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that encourages a player to launch the game medium toward a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during a predetermined period in which a start effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are displayed (e.g., an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1) to FIG. 13-46 (e21), during a jackpot round, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect is not performed while an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect is continued),
In a special state (e.g., a probability variable state, a time-saving state) after the control of the advantageous state ends, the second guidance display is continued (for example, a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance in the probability variable state after a big win as shown in FIG. 13-48 and FIG. 13-49),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) to FIG. 13-39 (d4), a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of a performance image in the special state (for example, an image display due to a group preview performance) (for example, a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display due to the group preview performance, as shown in Figure 13-49 (g5)).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent game, and during the subsequent big win round, the large right hit promotion effect is ended while the small right hit promotion effect is continued, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, by continuing the small right hit promotion effect even in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. Furthermore, after the big win occurs, the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round, and the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the image display of the group notice effect that is performed in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, so that the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. This makes it possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance message (for example, a message display encouraging a player to hit to the right) to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26) to FIG. 13-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
In a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is being controlled to a jackpot. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round is about to begin, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player is aware that he or she will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be heard smoothly by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion performance linked thereto is not output, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(3-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance message (for example, a message display encouraging a player to hit to the right) to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means is
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26) to FIG. 13-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
The guidance means does not emit the guidance light when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is being controlled to a jackpot. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round is about to begin, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player is aware that he or she will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion in conjunction with the first right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance in conjunction with the right hit promotion, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance message (for example, a message display encouraging a player to hit to the right) to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, a part that turns off the frame lamp once and then lights it in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output in conjunction with the guidance light being emitted (for example, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance);
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit part of the lamp moves to the right, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote the right hit, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the right hit promotion and a sound is output in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and no sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it is output, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance message (for example, a message display encouraging a player to hit to the right) to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guiding means is
After turning off the light-emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, after turning off the light once, the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit part of the lamp moves to the right, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote the right hit, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the right hit promotion and a sound is output in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start performance.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hit promotion effect shown in Figures 13-25 to 13-33 is larger than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in Figure 13-24 (c2), and the text images appear one by one in stages, and the execution time is longer and more emphasized. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he or she should hit right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emission, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output,
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps that are performed multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. For example, if the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is performed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, but do not output a sound in conjunction with the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect includes only sound data that is linked to the first right-hit promotion. This prevents the sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion from overlapping with the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hit promotion effect is performed, and allows the player to smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the first guidance light emission in association with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emitted among the multiple times of the guidance light emitted;
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the first right-hit promotion is linked to the speakers 8L and 8R and the speakers 8L and 8R also link to the subsequent right-hit promotions and output sounds corresponding to the right-hit promotion effects, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the right-hit promotion effects for the last right-hit promotion. For example, when the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds linked to the first and second right-hit promotions based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, but do not output sounds linked to the third right-hit promotion. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect only includes sound data linked to the first and second right-hit promotions. Note that the sound data only includes sound data linked to one right-hit promotion, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data linked to one right-hit promotion. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to two right-hit promotions, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to two right-hit promotions once. This allows the player to smoothly hear the background music during the jackpot round without the sound associated with the right-hit promotion overlapping with the background music during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hit promotion performance is executed.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-25(c3), a portion that turns off all of the lamps of the frame lamps once and then lights up the frame lamps in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, all of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are lit in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion performance, so that the player is encouraged to hit to the right in a clearer and more effective manner.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guidance light in association with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table,
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in Figure 13-34) that specifies the execution time of the guidance light emission, a child table (for example, the child table shown in Figure 13-35) that indicates a grandchild table in which the data referenced by the light-emitting means is specified, and the grandchild table (for example, the child tables shown in Figures 13-36 and 13-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9, including the frame lamps, refer to the parent table to determine the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, refer to the child table to determine the grandchild table in which the lighting data is specified, and refer to the grandchild table to turn on/blink/turn off. This allows the game effect lamps 9 to be lit efficiently in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) The grandchild table corresponding to the light-emitting means that does not emit the guidance light is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-35, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion performance and are therefore turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. This allows the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guidance means performs the guidance light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, a portion that sequentially lights up each lamp included in the frame lamp from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in Figures 13-25 to 13-33).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 13-25 to 13-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in sequence from the left side of the play area to the right side, a big right hit promotion effect is executed, which clearly encourages the player to hit to the right.

(12) The guidance means emits the guidance light while changing the light color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors while performing a big right-hit promotion effect, more effectively encouraging players to hit to the right.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images, which is performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 13-38 (d1) to 13-39 (d4), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 13-38 (d1) to Fig. 13-39 (d4), the small right-hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the background image switching display caused by the fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right even if the background image switching display causes the fanfare effect to switch to the jackpot round.

(14) The second guidance display, as a display of a performance image in the special state, is not affected by a display in a preview performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to a small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display in the group preview performance).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), in the probability variable state after the favorable state for a jackpot ends, the small right hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur. As a result, even if the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the advance notice effect being executed, the arrow image and text image in the small right hit promotion effect continue to be displayed without being hindered in visibility, so it is possible to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted either (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, as in the case of the first win, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized.

[Modification of characteristic portion 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned characteristic part 075F will be described.

(About turning off the lights before the big right hit promotion performance is performed)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-25(c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is turned on first in the big right hit promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be turned on. In this way, the connection when the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance afterwards can be clearly seen.

(About the display change during the big win round)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 13-38 (d1) to Fig. 13-39 (d4), when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, the background image is switched by fading in and out, but this is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, may be used.

In addition, the display change during the jackpot round may be to display a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music), and switch to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected on the BGM selection screen.

In addition, the switching display during the jackpot round may be a mode selection screen that allows the player to select a presentation mode, and the background image may be changed to one that corresponds to the mode selected on the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during a big win round, it is important that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(Display of the performance image during the probability change state after the big hit game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the reach effect, a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, a pseudo consecutive notice effect in which the decorative pattern changes and the temporary stop are repeated multiple times, or a light guide plate provided on the front side of the play area is turned on or blinked to make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult may be used. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(About the "Aim for the V" production)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning hole provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and an image pointing to the V large winning hole is displayed as the "Aim for V" performance as shown in Fig. 13-43 (e13). However, this is not limited to this, and the image display in the "Aim for V" performance, which is the third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area, is not limited to one pointing to the V large winning hole itself, but may also point to the vicinity of the V large winning hole, or may point to the path leading to the V large winning hole, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V large winning hole located upstream of the V large winning hole.

(About the promotion of big right hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then the text image "Hit right!!" appears, but this is not limited to this. For example, the text image "Hit right!!" may appear first, and then the arrow graphic image may appear. In addition, the image display of the large right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas the image display of the small right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display, may be composed of only an arrow image or only a text image.

(About advantageous situations)
In this embodiment, the period of the "advantageous state" is exemplified as the period shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 13-20 to t16 in FIG. 13-21), but is not limited thereto. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" may be the period excluding the fanfare effect period, that is, the period shown in FIG. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) (the period from t4 in FIG. 13-20 to t16 in FIG. 13-21). In addition, the fanfare effect and the big right hit promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the pattern that will cause a jackpot is determined (pattern determination period).

(About the right-hand hit promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot on a special chart 1, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame lamp may be made different depending on the type of jackpot on a special chart 1. For example, when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a guaranteed jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. In addition, if the jackpot on special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

(About the right-hit promotion effect in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

Also, depending on the type of consecutive wins on the special chart 2, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot on the special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a sure-win jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. If the consecutive hits on special chart 2 are a guaranteed jackpot, unlike the first hit on special chart 1, the frame lamp may light up in a special manner (for example, gold or seven colors) according to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a special manner according to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, the big right hit promotion performance may be executed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit on special chart 1.

(Regarding the third guide sign)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, an image pointing to the V-large winning hole during the jackpot round in the probability jackpot has been exemplified, but this is not limited thereto. For example, as the third guidance display, in the probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends, an image urging the player to aim at the second start winning hole and launch the game ball, or an image urging the player to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and launch the game ball may be displayed. For example, after the ending performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 may display a text image of "Aim!" on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image pointing to the second start winning hole or the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) based on receiving a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a pattern change designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a change pattern designation command (81 system command) from the CPU 103. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and text images in the small right hit promotion performance may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding control of time-saving state by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count for the time-saving state (time-saving count) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random numbers as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be set to a different time from the pattern confirmation times for other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F, the game state always goes through the jackpot game state in order to be controlled to the time-saving state, so the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect for encouraging the player to hit the right in the time-saving state can be performed during the fanfare effect that is performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if the above-mentioned losing symbol is used as the time-saving symbol, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot game state, so when the time-saving state is controlled in response to the display of the losing symbol, time must be secured to execute the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect between the display of the losing symbol and the control to the time-saving state. Therefore, the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect can be executed using the method shown below.

For example, if the pattern determination time until the fluctuation of a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern determination time until the losing pattern that is a time-saving pattern stops may be set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the time-saving pattern, and a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed during that time to notify the start of control of the time-saving state. In addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving as a command for specifying a loss, the CPU 103 may prepare a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving that grants time saving in addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving, and transmit a performance control command to the performance control CPU 120 using both commands depending on whether or not the time-saving pattern is a losing fluctuation. Then, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation, the pattern determination time may be set to 0.5 seconds, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving, the pattern determination time may be set to 30 seconds.

The performance control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") indicating the name of the time-saving state on the image display device 5 during the 30-second pattern determination time, outputs a sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state, and lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state. A portion of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a portion of the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2).

13-24(c1), an image (for example, a text image of "Congratulations!") celebrating the time-saving state may be displayed on the image display device 5 before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, a sound celebrating the time-saving state may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to a lighting mode celebrating the time-saving state. Also, as a small right-hit promotion effect, a small right-hit promotion effect may be executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow pointing to the right) and text (the text "Right hit") is displayed small on the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a sound encouraging right hitting may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-hit display unit 075F030 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 may be changed to a mode encouraging right hitting (lit). In addition, the image in the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 start and end at the same timing. In other words, both are designed to encourage the player to make a right hit for the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in FIG. 13-24(c2), the small right hit promotion effect may continue to be executed while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then, similar to the example shown in FIG. 13-25(c3), the game effect lamp 9 may be temporarily turned off, and then, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 13-25(c4) to FIG. 13-38(c26), the large right hit promotion effect may be executed during the time-saving fanfare effect. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after the large right hit promotion effect is executed, the game state may be controlled to the time-saving state, and the small right hit promotion effect may be continued, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 13-48 to FIG. 13-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing pattern, by ensuring a pattern determination time that is longer than the pattern determination time for a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern, it is possible to execute a large right hit promotion effect or a small right hit promotion effect during that pattern determination time.

In the case where the time-saving state is controlled by the losing symbol as a trigger, it is not limited to using the symbol determination time to execute the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect as described above. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to a miss for the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving is determined, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed in the next game (change). Specifically, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a miss change, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed instead without executing an effect that makes you expect a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect. However, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a big hit, the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) is executed afterwards, so the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for the next play (change) of a play in which a losing symbol that grants a time-saving bonus has been confirmed, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed while the symbol is not changing, and a large right hit promotion effect or a small right hit promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, in order to prevent a customer waiting demonstration effect from being executed and disrupting the time-saving fanfare effect, a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) is not sent from CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) is received from CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare effect without executing a customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 10 General winning hole 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 13 Sound control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First start hole switch 22B Second start hole switch 23 Count switch 25A First hold indicator 25B Second hold indicator 25C General hold indicator 30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gates 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 120 Performance control CPU
123 Display control unit 131 Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance;
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area ;
a guide light-emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light-emitting point of a specific light-emitting means among the plurality of light-emitting means ;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
displaying the second guidance display in a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, displaying the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period during the predetermined period that is after the first period , and in the subsequent period, ending the first guidance display while displaying the second guidance display;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
the guidance light-emitting means causes the specific light-emitting means to emit light in a manner different from the guidance light-emitting means during the first period, turns off the specific light-emitting means before the second period starts, and performs the guidance light-emitting means in conjunction with the first guidance display when the second period starts,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after the reach effect is started,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
A special vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means during a specific effect period, which is an execution period of the specific effect.
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means during the specific effect period can be executed,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
In the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, it is possible to light up a predetermined light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means among the plurality of light-emitting means,
The predetermined light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a common manner when the predetermined vibration performance is executed at the first timing and when the predetermined vibration performance is executed at the second timing,
When the first special vibration performance is executed and when the second special vibration performance is executed, the predetermined light emitting means can be caused to emit light in different manners.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images